[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025052998A1 - Curable composition, cured product, and optical member - Google Patents

Curable composition, cured product, and optical member Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025052998A1
WO2025052998A1 PCT/JP2024/030357 JP2024030357W WO2025052998A1 WO 2025052998 A1 WO2025052998 A1 WO 2025052998A1 JP 2024030357 W JP2024030357 W JP 2024030357W WO 2025052998 A1 WO2025052998 A1 WO 2025052998A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
curable composition
compound
mass
resin
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/JP2024/030357
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
鉄平 阿部
貴規 田口
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Fujifilm Corp
Original Assignee
Fujifilm Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujifilm Corp filed Critical Fujifilm Corp
Publication of WO2025052998A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025052998A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K3/00Use of inorganic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K3/18Oxygen-containing compounds, e.g. metal carbonyls
    • C08K3/20Oxides; Hydroxides
    • C08K3/22Oxides; Hydroxides of metals
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L101/00Compositions of unspecified macromolecular compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B1/00Optical elements characterised by the material of which they are made; Optical coatings for optical elements
    • G02B1/04Optical elements characterised by the material of which they are made; Optical coatings for optical elements made of organic materials, e.g. plastics
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/028Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with photosensitivity-increasing substances, e.g. photoinitiators
    • G03F7/031Organic compounds not covered by group G03F7/029

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a curable composition containing at least one selected from TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles.
  • the present invention also relates to a cured product and an optical component using the curable composition.
  • Optical components such as microlenses have been manufactured using curable compositions containing high refractive index particles such as TiO2 particles or ZrO2 particles.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses an invention related to a photosensitive resin composition containing particles such as TiO2 particles or ZrO2 particles, a dispersant, an alkali-soluble resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, and a solvent.
  • optical components such as microlenses are used by laminating them on other components or by laminating other layers on their surfaces.
  • microlenses are sometimes used with inorganic films formed on their surfaces.
  • the present inventors have conducted extensive studies on a cured product formed using a curable composition containing TiO2 particles or ZrO2 particles, and have found that when a composite having the cured product and another layer in contact with the cured product is left in a humid environment for a long period of time, wrinkles tend to form on the surface of the cured product in contact with the other layer.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a curable composition that can form a cured product in which the occurrence of wrinkles is suppressed even when the composition is left in a humid environment for a long period of time.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a cured product and an optical component.
  • the present invention provides the following.
  • the polyfunctional thiol compound is a compound having 2 to 4 secondary thiol groups in one molecule.
  • the particle A contains TiO2 particles.
  • ⁇ 5> The curable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the content of the particles A in the total solid content of the curable composition is 50 to 80 mass %.
  • ⁇ 6> The curable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the content of the polyfunctional thiol compound in the total solid content of the curable composition is 0.1 to 5 mass%.
  • ⁇ 7> The curable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, further comprising 10 to 45 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator relative to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
  • ⁇ 8> The curable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, further comprising 100 to 2,000 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator relative to 100 parts by mass of the polyfunctional thiol compound.
  • ⁇ 9> The curable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8>, wherein the photopolymerization initiator contains an oxime compound.
  • the photopolymerization initiator contains an oxime compound having two or more oxime groups in one molecule.
  • ⁇ 11> The curable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>, wherein the resin includes a resin having a graft chain and an acid group.
  • the resin includes a resin having a graft chain and an acid group.
  • ⁇ 13> The curable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 12>, in which, when the curable composition is used to form a film having a thickness of 0.4 to 1.0 ⁇ m by heating at 220° C. for 5 minutes, the film has a minimum transmittance of 75% or more in a wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm.
  • ⁇ 14> A cured product obtained by using the curable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 13>.
  • the present invention provides a curable composition that can form a cured product that is less susceptible to wrinkles even when left in a humid environment for a long period of time.
  • the present invention also provides a cured product and an optical component.
  • alkyl group encompasses not only alkyl groups that have no substituents (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also alkyl groups that have substituents (substituted alkyl groups).
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams.
  • Examples of light used for exposure include the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet light represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet light (EUV light), X-rays, active rays or radiation such as electron beams.
  • (meth)acrylate refers to both or either of acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth)acrylic refers to both or either of acrylic and methacrylic
  • (meth)acryloyl refers to both or either of acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • Me represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are values calculated as polystyrene standards measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
  • the total solids content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
  • the term "process” refers not only to an independent process, but also to a process that cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes, as long as the process achieves its intended effect.
  • the curable composition of the present invention comprises Particles A containing at least one selected from TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles; Resin and A polymerizable compound, A photopolymerization initiator; and a polyfunctional thiol compound.
  • the curable composition of the present invention can form a cured product in which the occurrence of wrinkles is suppressed even if it is placed in a humid environment for a long period of time. More specifically, it can form a cured product in which the occurrence of wrinkles is suppressed on the surface of the adjacent other layer side even if it is placed in a humid environment for a long period of time.
  • the minimum transmittance of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and especially preferably 90%.
  • the average transmittance of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and especially preferably 90%.
  • the solids concentration of the curable composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 30% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • the curable composition of the present invention contains particles A which contain at least one kind selected from TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles.
  • the average primary particle size of the TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles is preferably 10 to 200 nm.
  • the upper limit is preferably 150 nm or less, more preferably 100 nm or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 15 nm or more.
  • the average primary particle diameter of the particles is a value measured by the following method. That is, the primary particle diameter of the particles can be obtained by observing the particles with a transmission electron microscope (TEM) and observing the parts where the particles are not aggregated (primary particles). The particle size distribution of the primary particles can be obtained by taking a transmission electron micrograph of the primary particles with a transmission electron microscope, and then measuring the particle size distribution using the photograph with an image processing device.
  • the average primary particle diameter of the particles is defined as the arithmetic mean diameter on a number basis calculated from the particle size distribution of the primary particles.
  • an electron microscope (H-7000) manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd. is used as the transmission electron microscope
  • Luzex AP manufactured by Nireco Corporation is used as the image processing device.
  • the TiO2 particles and the ZrO2 particles are preferably white or transparent particles. Also, the particles A are preferably white or transparent particles.
  • particles A comprise TiO2 particles.
  • Particle A preferably contains at least one selected from TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles in an amount of 70% by mass or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more, even more preferably 90% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 95% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit can be 100% by mass.
  • the particles A preferably contain 70% by mass or more of TiO2 particles , more preferably 80% by mass or more, even more preferably 90% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 95% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit can be 100% by mass.
  • the content of particles A in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 50 to 80 mass%.
  • the upper limit is preferably 75 mass% or less, and more preferably 70 mass% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 55 mass% or more, and more preferably 60 mass% or more.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of particle A, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types of particle A are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the curable composition of the present invention contains a resin.
  • the resin is blended, for example, for dispersing particles in the curable composition or for use as a binder.
  • a resin used mainly for dispersing particles in the curable composition is also called a dispersant.
  • such uses of the resin are merely examples, and the resin can also be used for purposes other than such uses.
  • resins examples include (meth)acrylic resins, epoxy resins, (meth)acrylamide resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyimide resins, polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, and siloxane resins.
  • examples of the resin include the resin described in paragraphs 0091 to 0099 of WO 2022/065215, the blocked polyisocyanate resin described in JP 2016-222891 A, the resin described in JP 2020-122052 A, the resin described in JP 2020-111656 A, the resin described in JP 2020-139021 A, the resin described in JP 2017-138503 A containing a structural unit having a ring structure in the main chain and a structural unit having a biphenyl group in the side chain, and the resin described in paragraphs 0199 to 0199 of JP 2020-186373 A.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 3,000 to 2,000,000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, and more preferably 500,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 4,000 or more, and more preferably 5,000 or more.
  • the resin it is preferable to use a resin having an acid group.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphate group, a sulfo group, and a phenolic hydroxy group.
  • the acid value of the resin having acid groups is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH/g.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 40 mgKOH/g or more, and particularly preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, even more preferably 300 mgKOH/g or less, and particularly preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, and more preferably 5,000 to 50,000.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 1,000 to 20,000.
  • the resin having an acid group preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group on the side chain, and more preferably contains 5 to 70 mol% of the repeating units having an acid group on the side chain out of all the repeating units of the resin.
  • the upper limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group on the side chain is preferably 50 mol% or less, and more preferably 30 mol% or less.
  • the lower limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group on the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, and more preferably 20 mol% or more.
  • the resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain, more preferably a copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not having a basic group, and even more preferably a block copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not having a basic group.
  • the resin having a basic group can also be used as a dispersant.
  • the amine value of the resin having a basic group is preferably 5 to 300 mgKOH/g.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less.
  • resins with basic groups include DISPERBYK-161, 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 174, 182, 183, 184, 185, 2000, 2001, 2050, 2150, 2163, 2164, BYK-LPN6919 (all manufactured by BYK-Chemie), Solsperse 11200, 13240, 13650, 13940, 24 000, 26000, 28000, 32000, 32500, 32550, 32600, 33000, 34750, 35100, 35200, 37500, 38500, 39000, 53095, 56000, 7100 (all manufactured by Lubrizol Japan), Efka PX 4300, 4330, 4046, 4060, 4080 (all manufactured by BASF), and the like.
  • the resin having a basic group may be a block copolymer (B) described in paragraphs 0063 to 0112 of JP 2014-219665 A, a block copolymer A1 described in paragraphs 0046 to 0076 of JP 2018-156021 A, or a vinyl resin having a basic group described in paragraphs 0150 to 0153 of JP 2019-184763 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the storage stability of the curable composition can be further improved.
  • the content of the resin having a basic group is preferably 20 to 500 parts by mass, more preferably 30 to 300 parts by mass, and even more preferably 50 to 200 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the resin having an acid group.
  • a resin having an aromatic carboxy group As the resin, it is also preferable to use a resin having an aromatic carboxy group.
  • the aromatic carboxy group may be included in the main chain of a repeating unit, or may be included in a side chain of the repeating unit. It is preferable that the aromatic carboxy group is included in the main chain of a repeating unit.
  • an aromatic carboxy group refers to a group having a structure in which one or more carboxy groups are bonded to an aromatic ring.
  • the number of carboxy groups bonded to an aromatic ring is preferably 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 to 2.
  • resins having an aromatic carboxy group include the resins described in paragraphs 0082 to 0107 of WO 2021/166858.
  • the resin it is also preferable to use a resin having a crosslinkable group.
  • the crosslinkable group include a (meth)acryloyl group, an epoxy group, and an oxetanyl group.
  • the content of the resin having a crosslinkable group in the resin contained in the curable composition is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and even more preferably 70% by mass or more.
  • the resin it is preferable to use a resin having an acid group and a graft chain (hereinafter, also referred to as an acidic graft resin).
  • the acidic graft resin may be used as a binder or a dispersant.
  • the graft chain means a polymer chain that branches out from the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • the graft chain preferably has 40 to 10,000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, more preferably 50 to 2,000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, and even more preferably 60 to 500 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms.
  • the graft chain preferably contains repeating units of at least one structure selected from a polyether structure, a polyester structure, a poly(meth)acrylic structure, a polystyrene structure, a polyurethane structure, a polyurea structure, and a polyamide structure, more preferably contains repeating units of at least one structure selected from a polyether structure, a polyester structure, a poly(meth)acrylic structure, and a polystyrene structure, even more preferably contains repeating units of a polyether structure or a polyester structure, and particularly preferably contains repeating units of a polyester structure.
  • Examples of the repeating unit of the polyester structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-1), formula (G-4) or formula (G-5).
  • Examples of the repeating unit of the polyether structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-2).
  • Examples of the repeating unit of the poly(meth)acrylic structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-3).
  • Examples of the repeating unit of the polystyrene structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-6).
  • R G1 and R G2 each independently represent an alkylene group.
  • the alkylene group represented by R G1 and R G2 is not particularly limited, but is preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Q G1 represents --O-- or --NH--
  • L G1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L G1 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group (preferably an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, OCO-, -S-, and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
  • an alkylene group preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms
  • an alkyleneoxy group preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms
  • an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group preferably an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms
  • an arylene group preferably an arylene
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R G4 include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, a heteroarylthioether group, an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, and a blocked isocyanate group.
  • R G5 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R G6 represents an aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aryl group represented by R G6 is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and still more preferably 6 to 12.
  • the aryl group represented by R G6 may have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, a heteroarylthioether group, an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, and a blocked isocyanate group.
  • the terminal structure of the graft chain is not particularly limited. It may be a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, and a heteroarylthioether group.
  • the group has a steric repulsion effect, and it is preferable that the group is an alkyl group or an alkoxy group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched.
  • the graft chain is preferably a structure represented by the following formula (G-1a), (G-2a), (G-3a), (G-4a), (G-5a) or (G-6a), and more preferably a structure represented by formula (G-1a), (G-4a) or (G-5a).
  • R G1 and R G2 each represent an alkylene group
  • R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • Q G1 represents -O- or -NH-
  • L G1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R G5 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R G6 represents an aryl group
  • W 100 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • n1 to n6 each independently represent an integer of 2 or more.
  • R G1 to R G6 , Q G1 , and L G1 are synonymous with R G1 to R G6 , Q G1 , and L G1 described in formulas (G-1) to (G-6), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • W 100 is preferably a substituent.
  • substituents include the above-mentioned substituents.
  • n1 to n6 are each preferably an integer from 2 to 100, more preferably an integer from 2 to 80, and even more preferably an integer from 8 to 60.
  • R G1 in each repeating unit may be the same or different.
  • R G1 contains two or more different repeating units, the arrangement of each repeating unit is not particularly limited and may be random, alternating, or block. The same applies to formulas (G-2a) to (G-6a).
  • the graft chain has a structure represented by formula (G-1a), formula (G-4a), or formula (G-5a) and contains two or more different repeating units in R G1 .
  • the acidic graft resin is preferably a resin having a repeating unit having a graft chain.
  • An example of the repeating unit having a graft chain is a repeating unit represented by formula (e3).
  • a e30 represents a trivalent linking group
  • L e30 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
  • W e30 represents a graft chain.
  • Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by A e30 include a poly(meth)acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine linking group, a polyester linking group, a polyurethane linking group, a polyurea linking group, a polyamide linking group, a polyether linking group, and a polystyrene linking group.
  • a poly(meth)acrylic linking group or a polyalkyleneimine linking group is preferable, and a poly(meth)acrylic linking group is more preferable.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L e30 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, OCO-, -CONR x3 -, -S-, and a group formed by combining two or more of these groups.
  • R x3 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • the alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent.
  • the graft chain represented by W e30 includes the above-mentioned graft chain.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the repeating unit having a graft chain is preferably 1000 or more, more preferably 1000 to 10000, and even more preferably 1000 to 7500.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the repeating unit having a graft chain is a value calculated from the weight average molecular weight of the raw material monomer used in the polymerization of the repeating unit.
  • a repeating unit having a graft chain can be formed by polymerizing a macromonomer.
  • a macromonomer means a polymeric compound in which a polymerizable group is introduced at the polymer end.
  • the acid groups contained in the acidic graft resin include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphate group, with the carboxy group being preferred.
  • the acidic graft resin is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a graft chain and a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the acidic graft resin preferably contains 1 mol% or more of repeating units having a graft chain, more preferably 2 mol% or more, and even more preferably 3 mol% or more of repeating units having a graft chain, among all repeating units of the acidic graft resin.
  • the upper limit can be 90 mol%, 80 mol% or less, 70 mol% or less, 60 mol% or less, or 50 mol% or less.
  • the acidic graft resin preferably contains 1 mol% or more of repeating units having an acid group, more preferably 2 mol% or more, and even more preferably 3 mol% or more of repeating units having an acid group, among all repeating units of the acidic graft resin.
  • the upper limit can be 90 mol%, 80 mol% or less, 70 mol% or less, 60 mol% or less, or 50 mol% or less.
  • the acidic graft resin may further contain other repeating units in addition to those mentioned above.
  • the other repeating units include repeating units having a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and a cyclic ether group.
  • the acid value of the acidic graft resin is preferably 20 to 150 mgKOH/g.
  • the upper limit is preferably 130 mgKOH/g or less, and more preferably 110 mgKOH/g or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 30 mgKOH/g or more, and more preferably 40 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the acidic graft resin is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000, and even more preferably 10,000 to 30,000.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the acidic graft resin is preferably 2,500 to 50,000, more preferably 5,000 to 30,000, and even more preferably 5,000 to 15,000.
  • acidic graft resins include the resins described in paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP 2012-255128 A and the resins having the structures described in the examples described below.
  • the curable composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin as a dispersant.
  • dispersants include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins).
  • the term "acidic dispersant (acidic resin)” refers to a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups.
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of acid groups is 70 mol% or more when the total amount of the acid groups and the basic groups is 100 mol%.
  • the acid group possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxy group.
  • the acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mgKOH/g.
  • the basic dispersant refers to a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups.
  • the basic dispersant (basic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups when the total amount of the acid groups and the basic groups is 100 mol%.
  • the basic group possessed by the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is preferably a graft resin.
  • graft resin for details of the graft resin, refer to paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP 2012-255128 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is a resin having an aromatic carboxy group.
  • resins having an aromatic carboxy group include those mentioned above.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is preferably a polyimine-based dispersant containing nitrogen atoms in at least one of the main chain and side chain.
  • the polyimine-based dispersant is preferably a resin having a main chain with a partial structure having a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less, a side chain with 40 to 10,000 atoms, and having a basic nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and side chain.
  • the basic nitrogen atom so long as it is a nitrogen atom that exhibits basicity.
  • polyimine-based dispersants please refer to the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP 2012-255128 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is preferably one having a structure in which multiple polymer chains are bonded to a core portion.
  • resins include dendrimers (including star-shaped polymers).
  • dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP2013-043962A.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain.
  • the content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol % or more of the total repeating units of the resin, more preferably 10 to 80 mol %, and even more preferably 20 to 70 mol %.
  • resins described in JP 2018-087939 A, block copolymers (EB-1) to (EB-9) described in paragraphs 0219 to 0221 of Japanese Patent No. 6,432,077 A, polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in WO 2016/104803 A, block copolymers described in WO 2019/125940 A, block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP 2020-066687 A, block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP 2020-066688 A, dispersants described in WO 2016/104803 A, and the like can also be used.
  • Dispersants are also available as commercially available products, and specific examples include the DISPERBYK series manufactured by BYK-Chemie, the SOLSPERSE series manufactured by Lubrizol Nippon, the Efka series manufactured by BASF, and the AJISPER series manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine-Techno Co., Ltd.
  • the products described in paragraph 0129 of JP2012-137564A and the products described in paragraph 0235 of JP2017-194662A can also be used as dispersants.
  • the resin content in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 1 to 40% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 25% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the content of the acidic graft resin in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 1 to 30% by mass.
  • the upper limit is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of resin, or may contain two or more types of resins. When two or more types of resins are contained, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the curable composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound may be a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group may be a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, or a (meth)acryloyl group.
  • the polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radical polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form, such as a monomer, prepolymer, or oligomer, but is preferably a monomer.
  • the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 2500.
  • the upper limit is preferably 2000 or less, more preferably 1500 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 150 or more, more preferably 250 or more.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3 mmol/g or more, more preferably 4 mmol/g or more, and even more preferably 5 mmol/g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 12 mmol/g or less, more preferably 10 mmol/g or less, and even more preferably 8 mmol/g or less.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, more preferably a compound containing 3 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, and even more preferably a compound containing 3 to 6 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a 3-15 functional (meth)acrylate compound, and more preferably a 3-6 functional (meth)acrylate compound.
  • Specific examples of the polymerizable compound include the compounds described in paragraphs 0075 to 0083 of WO 2022/065215 and the compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 201832008.
  • Preferred polymerizable compounds include dipentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-320; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., and NK Ester A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and compounds in which the (meth)acryloyl groups are bonded via ethylene glycol and/or propylene glycol residues (e.g.,
  • polymerizable compounds examples include diglycerol EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth)acrylate (commercially available product is M-460; manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (NK Ester A-TMMT, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (KAYARAD HDDA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and NK Oligo UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • diglycerol EO ethylene oxide
  • methacrylate commercially available product is M-460; manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • NK Ester A-TMMT pentaerythri
  • a polymerizable compound having an ethylene oxide repeating chain can also be used. According to this embodiment, the effects of the present invention are more remarkable.
  • a compound represented by formula (EO-1) can be mentioned.
  • R E1 in formula (EO-1) represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • L E1 in formula (EO-1) represents an m-valent linking group.
  • Examples of the m-valent linking group represented by L E1 include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, -O-, -S-, -NR A1 -, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -SO 2 -, and a group obtained by combining two or more of these groups.
  • R A1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be cyclic or non-cyclic.
  • the non-cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a straight-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon group or a branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent or may not have a substituent.
  • the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a single ring or a condensed ring.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • the heteroatom constituting the heterocyclic group may be a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, etc.
  • n represents an integer from 1 to 20
  • m represents an integer from 2 to 10.
  • n is preferably an integer from 1 to 15, and more preferably an integer from 1 to 10.
  • m is preferably an integer from 2 to 8, and more preferably an integer from 2 to 6.
  • a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used.
  • the polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton is preferably a bifunctional polymerizable compound.
  • a compound having a partial structure represented by the following formula (Fr) can be mentioned.
  • * represents a bond
  • R f1 and R f2 each independently represent a substituent
  • m and n each independently represent an integer of 0 to 5.
  • m R f1s may be the same or different from each other, and two R f1s among the m R f1s may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • n R f2s may be the same or different from each other, and two R f2s among the n R f2s may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • R f1 and R f2 examples include a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, -OR f11 , -COR f12 , -COOR f13 , -OCOR f14 , -NR f15 R f16 , -NHCOR f17 , -CONR f18 R f19 , -NHCONR f20 R f21 , -NHCOOR f22 , -SR f23 , -SO 2 R f24 , -SO 2 OR f25 , -NHSO 2 R f26 , and -SO 2 NR f27 R f28 .
  • R f11 to R f28 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group.
  • polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton examples include compounds having the following structure: Furthermore, commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton include OGSOL EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd., (meth)acrylate monomers having a fluorene skeleton).
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 1 to 25 mass%.
  • the upper limit is preferably 20 mass% or less, and more preferably 15 mass% or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 3 mass% or more, and more preferably 5 mass% or more.
  • the curable composition preferably contains 5 to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound per 100 parts by mass of the resin.
  • the upper limit of the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 80 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 70 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit of the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerizable compound, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types of polymerizable compounds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the curable composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, a compound having photosensitivity to light rays in the ultraviolet range to the visible range is preferred.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • Photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, etc.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.
  • acylphosphine compounds e.g., acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, etc.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a trihalomethyltriazine compound, a benzyl dimethyl ketal compound, an ⁇ -hydroxyketone compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound, an acylphosphine compound, a phosphine oxide compound, a metallocene compound, an oxime compound, a hexaarylbiimidazole compound, an onium compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound, a cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complex, a halomethyloxadiazole compound, or a 3-aryl substituted coumarin compound, more preferably a compound selected from an oxime compound, an ⁇ -hydroxyketone compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound, and an acylphosphine compound, and even more preferably an oxime compound.
  • examples of the photopolymerization initiator include the compounds described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP 2014-130173 A, the compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6301489 A, and the compounds described in MATERIAL STAGE 37 to 60p, vol. 19, No.
  • Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include the compound described in WO 2019/013112, the compound having a triarylamine or N-arylcarbazole skeleton described in paragraphs 0042 to 0062 of WO 2019/013112, the oxime ester-based photopolymerization initiator described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 7219378, the photopolymerization initiator described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2021-0146174, the photopolymerization initiator described in WO 2019/013112, and the photopolymerization initiator described in JP 2023-033731.
  • hexaarylbiimidazole compounds include 2,2',4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1'-biimidazole.
  • ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure 127 (all manufactured by BASF), etc.
  • Commercially available ⁇ -aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 907, Irgacure 369, Irgacure 369E, Irgacure 379EG (all manufactured by BASF), etc.
  • Commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 819, Irgacure TPO (all manufactured by BASF), etc.
  • Examples of oxime compounds include the compound described in paragraph 0142 of WO 2022/085485, the compound described in Japanese Patent No. 5,430,746, the compound described in Japanese Patent No. 5,647,738, the compound represented by general formula (1) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0022 to 0024 of JP 2021-173858 A, the compound represented by general formula (1) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0117 to 0120 of JP 2021-170089 A, and the like.
  • oxime compound examples include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-3-cyclohexyl-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-acetyloxime), and the like.
  • an oxime compound having a fluorene ring an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is replaced with a naphthalene ring, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom, an oxime compound having a nitro group, an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton, an oxime compound in which a substituent having a hydroxyl group is bonded to a carbazole skeleton, or a compound described in paragraphs 0143 to 0149 of WO 2022/085485 can be used.
  • a compound represented by formula (OX-1) can also be used.
  • X 1a represents a divalent linking group containing at least one ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic ring and a heterocycle;
  • R 1a represents a hydrogen atom or an acyl group;
  • R2a represents an alkyl group or an aryl group;
  • R 3a and R 4a each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
  • Alk 1 and Alk 2 each independently represent an alkyl group;
  • R 3a and R 4a may be bonded to form a ring;
  • Alk 1 and Alk 2 may be linked to form a ring;
  • n represents 0 or 1.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by X 1a in formula (OX-1) include a divalent aromatic ring group, a divalent heterocyclic group, a divalent group in which two or more aromatic rings are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, a divalent group in which two or more heterocycles are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, and a divalent group in which an aromatic ring and a heterocycle are bonded via a single bond or a linking group.
  • Examples of the linking group that bonds the above-mentioned aromatic rings, heterocyclic groups, or aromatic rings and heterocycles include -CH 2 -, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -NR x -, and groups combining these.
  • R x represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • X 1a in formula (OX-1) is preferably a group represented by any one of formulas (X-1) to (X-13), more preferably a group represented by formula (X-1), formula (X-2), formula (X-4), formula (X-6) or formula (X-8), and further preferably a group represented by formula (X-2) or formula (X-6).
  • R X1 to R X9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 2 to 15, and more preferably 2 to 10.
  • the alkenyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkenyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkynyl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 2 to 15, and more preferably 2 to 10.
  • the alkynyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkynyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the heterocyclic group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered ring.
  • the heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic group are preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and an aryl group.
  • R 1a represents a hydrogen atom or an acyl group, and is preferably an acyl group.
  • the acyl group represented by R 1a is preferably a group represented by —C(O)—R 101.
  • R 101 represents an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and is preferably an aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aryl group represented by R 101 is preferably 6 to 20, and more preferably 6 to 12.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the aryl group represented by R 101 is preferably a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a methylphenyl group or a naphthyl group.
  • the heterocyclic group represented by R 101 is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered ring.
  • the heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic group are preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and an aryl group.
  • R 2a in formula (OX-1) represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group because the reactivity of the generated radical is high.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R 2a is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 2a is preferably an unsubstituted linear or branched alkyl group, and more preferably an unsubstituted linear alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R 2a is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted aryl group.
  • R 3a and R 4a each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 3a and R 4a is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group.
  • R3a and R4a may be bonded to form a ring.
  • the ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.
  • Alk 1 and Alk 2 each independently represent an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group.
  • Alk1 and Alk2 may be bonded to form a ring, and preferably form a ring.
  • the ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring, more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and more preferably a cyclopentane ring or a cyclohexane ring.
  • n 0 or 1, and is preferably 0.
  • a compound represented by formula (OX-2) can also be used.
  • R 1b and R 2b each independently represent a substituent
  • R 3b to R 7b each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • Ar 1b represents an aromatic ring group or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent
  • n represents 0 or 1.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R 1b and R 2b include an alkyl group and an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, even more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • R 3b to R 7b include a halogen atom, an alkyl group and an aryl group, the alkyl group and the aryl group being as described above.
  • R 3b to R 7b are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • Ar 1b represents an aromatic ring group or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and Ar 1b is preferably an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent.
  • the aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.
  • the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a nitro group, and an acyl group, and an acyl group, and an acyl group is preferable.
  • the acyl group include the acyl groups described above.
  • a photopolymerization initiator As a photopolymerization initiator, a compound represented by formula (OX-3) can also be used.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R 1c and R 2c include an alkyl group and an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, even more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent.
  • R 2c is preferably an alkyl group having a branched or cyclic structure.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by R3c include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, and an acyl group, and an acyl group, and an acyl group is preferable.
  • Examples of the acyl group include the acyl groups described above.
  • Ar 1c represents a (k+m+1)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+m+1)-valent heterocyclic group, and is preferably a (k+m+1)-valent aromatic ring group.
  • the aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.
  • Ar2c represents a (k+2)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+2)-valent heterocyclic group, and is preferably a (k+2)-valent aromatic ring group.
  • the aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.
  • k represents 0 or 1, and is preferably 0.
  • n represents an integer from 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 1.
  • the photopolymerization initiator it is also preferable to use an oxime compound having two or more oxime groups in one molecule. According to this embodiment, it is possible to form a cured product such as an optical component in which the occurrence of wrinkles on the surface adjacent to other layers is further suppressed in a humid environment.
  • the oxime compound having two or more oxime groups in one molecule is preferably a compound represented by formula (OX-10).
  • X represents a divalent linking group.
  • R 11 and R 12 each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
  • R 13 and R 14 each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryl group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
  • m and n each independently represent 0 or 1.
  • the divalent linking group represented by X 11 in formula (OX-10) is preferably a divalent linking group containing at least one ring selected from an aromatic ring and a heterocyclic ring.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by X11 include a divalent aromatic ring group, a divalent heterocyclic group, a divalent group in which two or more aromatic rings are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, a divalent group in which two or more heterocycles are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, and a divalent group in which an aromatic ring and a heterocycle are bonded via a single bond or a linking group.
  • linking group examples include -CH2- , -O-, -CO-, -S-, -NRx- , and groups combining these.
  • Rx represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • divalent linking group represented by X11 include groups represented by any of formulas (X-101) to (X-109). From the viewpoint of the remarkable effect of the present invention, a group represented by any of formulas (X-101) to (X-104) is preferable, and a group represented by formula (X-101) is more preferable.
  • R Y1 to R Y4 each independently represent a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • R X1 to R X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group;
  • m1 and m2 each independently represent 0 to 4;
  • m3 and m4 each independently represent 0 to 3.
  • the halogen atom represented by R Y1 to R Y4 includes a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R Y1 to R Y4 and R X1 to R X3 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R Y1 to R Y4 and R X1 to R X3 is preferably 6 to 15, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group represented by R Y1 to R Y4 and R X1 to R X3 is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group include nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, and sulfur atoms.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 to 2.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
  • R 11 and R 12 each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R 11 and R 12 is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 11 and R 12 is particularly preferably a methyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R 11 and R 12 is preferably 6 to 15, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent.
  • the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group represented by R 11 and R 12 is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 to 2.
  • the heteroaryl group may be a single ring or a condensed ring.
  • the heteroaryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
  • R 11 and R 12 each independently represent preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably an alkyl group.
  • R 13 and R 14 in formula (OX-10) each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryl group, or a heteroaryloxy group, preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group, aryl group and heteroaryl group represented by R 13 and R 14 include those groups represented by R 11 and R 12 in formula (OX-10), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkoxy group represented by R 13 and R 14 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkoxy group may be either linear or branched.
  • the alkoxy group may have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryloxy group represented by R 13 and R 14 is preferably 6 to 15, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6.
  • the aryloxy group may have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl moiety in the heteroaryloxy group represented by R 13 and R 14 is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10.
  • the types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl moiety include nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, and sulfur atoms.
  • the number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl moiety is preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 to 2.
  • the heteroaryl moiety may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
  • the heteroaryloxy group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
  • n each independently represent 0 or 1, and are preferably 1.
  • oxime compounds include the compounds shown below and the compounds described in the Examples below.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 10 mass%.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5 mass% or more, and more preferably 1 mass% or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 8 mass% or less, and more preferably 5 mass% or less.
  • the curable composition of the present invention preferably contains 10 to 45 parts by mass of a photopolymerization initiator per 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 11 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 12 parts by mass or more.
  • the curable composition of the present invention preferably contains 100 to 2000 parts by mass of a photopolymerization initiator per 100 parts by mass of a multifunctional thiol compound described below.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1500 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 1000 parts by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 150 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 200 parts by mass or more.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the curable compound of the present invention includes a polyfunctional thiol compound.
  • the polyfunctional thiol compound is a compound having two or more thiol groups in one molecule.
  • the number of thiol groups in the polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6, and even more preferably 2 to 4.
  • the thiol group of the polyfunctional thiol compound may be a primary thiol group, a secondary thiol group, or a tertiary thiol group.
  • a secondary thiol group is preferable because it can improve the storage stability of the curable composition and can form a cured product such as an optical component in which the occurrence of wrinkles on the surface adjacent to other layers is more suppressed in a humid environment.
  • a primary thiol group means a thiol group in which the carbon atom to which the thiol group is bonded is a primary carbon atom
  • a secondary thiol group means a thiol group in which the carbon atom to which the thiol group is bonded is a secondary carbon atom
  • a tertiary thiol group means a thiol group in which the carbon atom to which the thiol group is bonded is a tertiary carbon atom.
  • the secondary thiol group is preferably a group represented by formula (th-1).
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R th1 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and further preferably 1 to 3.
  • R th1 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.
  • the molecular weight of the polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably 100 to 1000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 800 or less, and more preferably 600 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 150 or more, and more preferably 200 or more.
  • the polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a compound represented by formula (T-1).
  • L T1 represents an n-valent group
  • R T1 and R T2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • n represents an integer of 2 or more.
  • R T1 and R T2 are hydrogen atom, and the other is an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R T1 and R T2 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and further preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group represented by R T1 and R T2 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.
  • Examples of the n-valent group represented by L T1 in formula (T-1) include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, -O-, -S-, -NR LT1 -, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -SO 2 -, or a group consisting of a combination thereof.
  • R LT1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be cyclic or noncyclic.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent or may not have a substituent.
  • the cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. Examples of the heteroatom constituting the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.
  • n represents an integer of 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 10, more preferably an integer of 2 to 6, and even more preferably an integer of 2 to 4.
  • polyfunctional thiol compounds include the compounds described in the Examples below and the compounds described in paragraphs 0100 to 0103 of WO 2019/188652.
  • Commercially available polyfunctional thiol compounds include PEMP (manufactured by SC Organic Chemical Co., Ltd.), Suncerar M (manufactured by Sanshin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Karenz MT BD1, Karenz MT TPMB, Karenz MT PE1, Karenz MT NR1 (all manufactured by Resonac Co., Ltd.), etc.
  • the content of the polyfunctional thiol compound in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 5 mass%.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.3 mass% or more, and more preferably 0.5 mass% or more, because this allows for the formation of a cured product in which the occurrence of wrinkles is suppressed.
  • the upper limit is preferably 3 mass% or less, and more preferably 2 mass% or less, from the viewpoint of the pattern shape.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polyfunctional thiol compound, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the curable composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent.
  • the solvent include organic solvents.
  • the type of solvent is not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coatability of the curable composition are satisfied.
  • the organic solvent include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents. For details of these, reference can be made to paragraph number 0223 of International Publication No. 2015/166779, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • ester-based solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and ketone-based solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used.
  • organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, 2-pentanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol
  • the amount of aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) used as organic solvents for environmental reasons, etc. (for example, the amount can be 50 ppm (parts per million) by mass or less, 10 ppm by mass or less, or 1 ppm by mass or less, relative to the total amount of organic solvents).
  • the metal content of the organic solvent is preferably low.
  • the metal content of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 10 parts per billion (ppb) by mass or less. If necessary, organic solvents at the ppt (parts per trillion) by mass level may be used, and such organic solvents are provided, for example, by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (The Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015).
  • Methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include, for example, distillation (molecular distillation, thin-film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter.
  • the filter used for filtration preferably has a pore size of 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 3 ⁇ m or less.
  • the filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.
  • the organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures).
  • the organic solvent may contain only one type of isomer, or multiple types of isomers.
  • the peroxide content in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol/L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.
  • the content of the solvent in the curable composition is preferably 10 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 90% by mass.
  • the curable composition of the present invention is substantially free of environmentally regulated substances.
  • substantially free of environmentally regulated substances means that the content of environmentally regulated substances in the curable composition is 50 ppm by mass or less, preferably 30 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 10 ppm by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 ppm by mass or less.
  • environmentally regulated substances include benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene.
  • a method for reducing the environmentally regulated substances a method of reducing the environmentally regulated substances by heating or reducing the pressure in the system to a temperature above the boiling point of the environmentally regulated substances and distilling off the environmentally regulated substances from the system can be mentioned.
  • a polymerization inhibitor or the like may be added and then distilled off under reduced pressure in order to suppress the radical polymerization reaction from proceeding during distillation under reduced pressure and causing crosslinking between molecules.
  • distillation methods can be used at any stage, such as the stage of the raw materials, the stage of the product obtained by reacting the raw materials (for example, a resin solution or a polyfunctional monomer solution after polymerization), or the stage of the curable composition prepared by mixing these compounds.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain a compound having a cyclic ether group.
  • the cyclic ether group include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group.
  • the epoxy group may be an alicyclic epoxy group.
  • the alicyclic epoxy group means a monovalent functional group having a cyclic structure in which an epoxy ring and a saturated hydrocarbon ring are condensed.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably a compound having an epoxy group (hereinafter also referred to as an epoxy compound).
  • the epoxy compound include compounds having one or more epoxy groups in one molecule, and compounds having two or more epoxy groups are preferred.
  • the epoxy compound is preferably a compound having 1 to 100 epoxy groups in one molecule.
  • the upper limit of the epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound can be, for example, 10 or less, or 5 or less.
  • the lower limit of the epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is preferably 2 or more.
  • the compounds described in paragraphs 0034 to 0036 of JP-A-2013-011869, paragraphs 0147 to 0156 of JP-A-2014-043556, and paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of JP-A-2014-089408, and the compounds described in JP-A-2017-179172 can also be used.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group may be a low molecular weight compound (e.g., a molecular weight of less than 2000, or even less than 1000) or a high molecular weight compound (macromolecule) (e.g., a molecular weight of 1000 or more, or in the case of a polymer, a weight average molecular weight of 1000 or more).
  • the weight average molecular weight of the compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably 200 to 100,000, more preferably 500 to 50,000.
  • the upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is more preferably 10,000 or less, particularly preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less.
  • EHPE3150 manufactured by Daicel Corporation
  • EPICLON N-695 manufactured by DIC Corporation
  • Marproof G-0150M G-0105SA, G-0130SP, G-0250SP, G-1005S, G-1005SA, G-1010S, G-2050M, G-01100, and G-01758 (all manufactured by NOF Corporation, epoxy group-containing polymers).
  • the content of the compound having a cyclic ether group in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 20 mass%.
  • the lower limit is, for example, more preferably 0.5 mass% or more, and even more preferably 1 mass% or more.
  • the upper limit is, for example, more preferably 15 mass% or less, and even more preferably 10 mass% or less.
  • Only one type of compound having a cyclic ether group may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain an ultraviolet absorber.
  • ultraviolet absorbers include conjugated diene compounds, aminodiene compounds, salicylate compounds, benzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, acrylonitrile compounds, hydroxyphenyltriazine compounds, indole compounds, triazine compounds, and dibenzoyl compounds. Specific examples of such compounds include the compounds described in paragraph 0179 of International Publication No. 2022/085485, the reactive triazine ultraviolet absorbers described in JP-A-2021-178918, the ultraviolet absorbers described in JP-A-2022-007884, the compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass.
  • the ultraviolet absorbing agent may be used alone or in combination with two or more kinds. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount is in the above range.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization inhibitor.
  • the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), and N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salt (ammonium salt, cerous salt, etc.).
  • p-methoxyphenol is preferred.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass.
  • the polymerization inhibitor may be one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain a silane coupling agent.
  • the silane coupling agent include silane compounds having a hydrolyzable group, and it is preferable that the silane coupling agent is a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups.
  • the hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can generate a siloxane bond by at least one of a hydrolysis reaction and a condensation reaction.
  • Examples of the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, and an acyloxy group, and an alkoxy group is preferable.
  • the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group.
  • functional groups other than the hydrolyzable group include a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a mercapto group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an amino group, a ureido group, a sulfide group, an isocyanate group, and a phenyl group, and an amino group, a (meth)acryloyl group, and an epoxy group are preferable.
  • Specific examples of the silane coupling agent include the compounds described in paragraph 0177 of International Publication No.
  • the content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.01 to 15.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 10.0% by mass.
  • the silane coupling agent may be one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant various surfactants such as fluorine-based surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, anionic surfactants, and silicone-based surfactants may be used.
  • the surfactant is preferably a silicone-based surfactant or a fluorine-based surfactant, and more preferably a silicone-based surfactant.
  • Nonionic surfactants include the compounds described in paragraph 0174 of WO 2022/085485.
  • Silicone surfactants include DOWSIL SH8400, SH8400 FLUID, FZ-2122, 67 Additive, 74 Additive, M Additive, and SF 8419.
  • OIL all manufactured by Dow Toray Co., Ltd.
  • TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 all manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials, Inc.
  • KP-341, KF-6000, KF-6001, KF-6002, KF-6003 all manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-333, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 all manufactured by BYK-Chemie
  • As the silicone surfactant a compound having the following structure can also be used.
  • the content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3.0% by mass.
  • the surfactant may be one type or two or more types. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant.
  • the antioxidant include phenolic compounds, phosphite compounds, and thioether compounds.
  • the phenolic compound any phenolic compound known as a phenolic antioxidant may be used.
  • a preferred phenolic compound is a hindered phenolic compound.
  • a compound having a substituent at the site (ortho position) adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group is preferred.
  • a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms is preferred.
  • the antioxidant is also preferably a compound having a phenolic group and a phosphite ester group in the same molecule.
  • a phosphorus-based antioxidant may also be suitably used as the antioxidant.
  • phosphorus-based antioxidants include tris[2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis(1,1-dimethylethyl)dibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-6-yl]oxy]ethyl]amine, tris[2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-2-yl)oxy]ethyl]amine, and ethylbis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl)phosphite.
  • antioxidants include, for example, Adeka STAB AO-20, Adeka STAB AO-30, Adeka STAB AO-40, Adeka STAB AO-50, Adeka STAB AO-50F, Adeka STAB AO-60, Adeka STAB AO-60G, Adeka STAB AO-80, and Adeka STAB AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
  • the antioxidant may be a compound described in paragraphs 0023 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967, a compound described in International Publication No. WO 2017/006600, a compound described in International Publication No. WO 2017/164024, or a compound described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0059371.
  • the content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.01 to 20 mass%, more preferably 0.3 to 15 mass%. Only one type of antioxidant may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount is in the above range.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain, as necessary, a sensitizer, a plasticizer, and other auxiliaries (e.g., conductive particles, fillers, defoamers, flame retardants, leveling agents, peeling promoters, fragrances, surface tension regulators, chain transfer agents, etc.).
  • auxiliaries e.g., conductive particles, fillers, defoamers, flame retardants, leveling agents, peeling promoters, fragrances, surface tension regulators, chain transfer agents, etc.
  • the curable composition of the present invention is substantially free of terephthalic acid esters.
  • substantially free means that the content of terephthalic acid esters in the total amount of the curable composition is 1000 ppb by mass or less, more preferably 100 ppb by mass or less, and particularly preferably zero.
  • the curable composition of the present invention has a melamine content of 10,000 ppm by mass or less.
  • perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts may be restricted.
  • the content of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid (particularly perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and its salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid (particularly perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and its salts is preferably in the range of 0.01 ppb to 1,000 ppb, more preferably in the range of 0.05 ppb to 500 ppb, and even more preferably in the range of 0.1 ppb to 300 ppb, based on the total solid content of the curable composition.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts.
  • a curable composition that is substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt may be selected.
  • Examples of compounds that can be a substitute for regulated compounds include compounds that are excluded from the scope of regulation due to the difference in the number of carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group. However, the above content does not prevent the use of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt.
  • the curable composition of the present invention may contain perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt within the maximum allowable range.
  • fluorine-containing compounds may be restricted from the perspective of environmental regulations.
  • the content of fluorine-containing compounds in the curable composition is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, and even more preferably 0.1% by mass or less.
  • the curable composition may be substantially free of fluorine-containing compounds.
  • the water content of the curable composition of the present invention is usually 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, and more preferably in the range of 0.1 to 1.0% by mass.
  • the water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.
  • the curable composition of the present invention can be used by adjusting the viscosity for the purpose of adjusting the film surface state (flatness, etc.) and film thickness.
  • the viscosity value can be selected appropriately as needed, but for example, a value of 0.3 mPa ⁇ s to 50 mPa ⁇ s at 25°C is preferable, and 0.5 mPa ⁇ s to 20 mPa ⁇ s is more preferable.
  • the viscosity can be measured, for example, using a cone-plate type viscometer with the temperature adjusted to 25°C.
  • the container for storing the curable composition is not particularly limited, and a known container can be used.
  • the container described in paragraph 0187 of WO 2022/085485 can be used as the container.
  • the curable composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above-mentioned components.
  • all the components may be simultaneously dissolved and/or dispersed in a solvent to prepare the curable composition, or, if necessary, each component may be appropriately prepared as two or more solutions or dispersions, which are mixed at the time of use (at the time of application) to prepare the curable composition.
  • a process for dispersing particles when preparing the curable composition, it is preferable to include a process for dispersing particles.
  • mechanical forces used for dispersing particles include compression, squeezing, impact, shear, and cavitation.
  • Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high-speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high-pressure wet atomization, and ultrasonic dispersion.
  • grinding particles in a sand mill (bead mill) it is preferable to use beads with a small diameter and increase the bead packing rate to perform processing under conditions that increase the grinding efficiency.
  • the process and dispersing machine for dispersing particles can be suitably used as described in "Dispersion Technology Encyclopedia, published by Information Technology Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005” or "Dispersion Technology and Industrial Application Practice Focusing on Suspension (Solid/Liquid Dispersion System) - Comprehensive Data Collection, published by Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978", and JP2015-157893, paragraph number 0022.
  • the particles may be refined in a salt milling process. For the materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc.
  • Examples of materials for beads used for dispersion include zirconia, agate, quartz, titania, tungsten carbide, silicon nitride, alumina, stainless steel, and glass.
  • the beads may also be made of an inorganic compound with a Mohs hardness of 2 or more.
  • the curable composition may contain 1 to 10,000 ppm of the beads.
  • the curable composition When preparing the curable composition, it is preferable to filter the curable composition with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign matter and reducing defects.
  • filters and filtration methods used for filtration include the filters and filtration methods described in paragraphs 0196 to 0199 of WO 2022/085485.
  • the cured product of the present invention is obtained by using the above-mentioned curable composition of the present invention.
  • the cured product of the present invention can be preferably used for optical members such as microlenses.
  • the minimum transmittance of the cured product of the present invention in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and particularly preferably 90% or more.
  • the average transmittance of the cured product of the present invention in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and particularly preferably 90% or more.
  • the refractive index of the cured product of the present invention with respect to light having a wavelength of 550 nm is preferably 1.5 to 2.2.
  • the upper limit is preferably 2.1 or less, and more preferably 2.0 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1.7 or more, and more preferably 1.8 or more.
  • the optical member of the present invention When the optical member of the present invention is used as a microlens, it is preferable to process the curable composition of the present invention into a lens shape before use. In other words, it is preferable that the microlens is obtained by processing the curable composition of the present invention into a lens shape.
  • the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and especially preferably 90% or more.
  • the average transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and especially preferably 90% or more.
  • the refractive index of the microlens for light with a wavelength of 550 nm is preferably 1.5 to 2.2.
  • the upper limit is preferably 2.1 or less, and more preferably 2.0 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1.7 or more, and more preferably 1.8 or more.
  • the lens shape of the microlens is not particularly limited, and can take a variety of shapes derived from optical system design. Examples include convex and concave shapes.
  • the radius of curvature of the lens is not particularly limited, and is preferably set appropriately within a range that produces the desired effect.
  • the thickness of the microlens is preferably 0.3 to 1.5 ⁇ m.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1.3 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.4 ⁇ m or more, and more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more.
  • the thickness of the microlens refers to the thickness of the thickest part of the microlens. For example, in the case of a double-convex lens, it refers to the distance from the apex of one convex surface to the apex of the other convex surface.
  • a protective layer may be provided on the surface of the macro lens.
  • various functions such as oxygen blocking, low reflection, hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity, and blocking of light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, infrared rays, etc.) can be imparted.
  • the thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.1 to 5 ⁇ m.
  • Methods for forming the protective layer include a method of forming the protective layer by applying a resin composition for forming the protective layer, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of attaching a molded resin with an adhesive.
  • the protective layer in the case of a protective layer intended for oxygen blocking, preferably contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 , and Si 2 N 4.
  • the protective layer in the case of a protective layer intended for low reflection, preferably contains a (meth)acrylic resin and a fluorine resin.
  • a protective layer by applying a resin composition When forming a protective layer by applying a resin composition, known methods such as spin coating, casting, screen printing, and inkjet can be used as a method for applying the resin composition.
  • Known organic solvents e.g., propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl lactate, etc.
  • thermal chemical vapor deposition, plasma chemical vapor deposition, photochemical vapor deposition can be used as the chemical vapor deposition method.
  • the protective layer may contain additives such as organic or inorganic fine particles, absorbents for light of specific wavelengths (e.g., ultraviolet light, infrared light, etc.), refractive index adjusters, antioxidants, adhesion agents, and surfactants, as necessary.
  • organic or inorganic fine particles include polymer fine particles (e.g., silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, titanium oxynitride, magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, and barium sulfate.
  • Known absorbents can be used as absorbents for light of specific wavelengths.
  • the content of these additives can be adjusted as appropriate, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass, and more preferably 1 to 60% by mass, based on the total mass of the protective layer.
  • the protective layer may be the one described in paragraphs 0073 to 0092 of JP2017-151176A.
  • the method for producing a microlens preferably includes a step of forming a composition layer by applying the above-mentioned curable composition of the present invention onto a support, and a step of processing the curable composition layer into a lens shape. Each step will be described below.
  • the curable composition of the present invention is used to form a composition layer on a support.
  • the support include a glass substrate and a silicon substrate, and a silicon substrate is preferable.
  • a charge-coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, an optical filter such as a color filter, etc. may be formed on the silicon substrate.
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • a black matrix that isolates each pixel may be formed on the silicon substrate.
  • the curable composition can be applied by any known method.
  • the method include the drop casting method, slit coating method, spray method, roll coating method, spin coating method, casting method, slit and spin method, pre-wetting method (for example, the method described in JP 2009-145395 A), various printing methods such as ejection printing such as inkjet (for example, on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method) and nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, and metal mask printing method, transfer method using a mold, etc., and nanoimprint method.
  • ejection printing such as inkjet (for example, on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method) and nozzle jet
  • flexographic printing for example, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, and metal mask printing method
  • transfer method using a mold, etc. and nanoimprint method.
  • the application method using an inkjet printer is not particularly limited, and examples of the method include those described in "Expanding and Usable Inkjet Printing - Infinite Possibilities Seen in Patents -, published in February 2005 by Sumibe Techno Research" (particularly pages 115 to 133), and those described in JP-A-2003-262716, JP-A-2003-185831, JP-A-2003-261827, JP-A-2012-126830, and JP-A-2006-169325.
  • the description of the application method of the curable composition can be found in WO 2017/030174 and WO 2017/018419, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked).
  • the prebaking temperature is preferably 100°C or less, more preferably 90°C or less, even more preferably 80°C or less, and particularly preferably 70°C or less.
  • the lower limit can be, for example, 40°C or more.
  • the prebaking time is preferably 10 to 3600 seconds. Prebaking can be performed using a hot plate, an oven, etc.
  • the composition layer can be processed into a lens shape by a conventionally known processing method, such as a transfer method, an imprint method, or a heat drip method.
  • a composition layer formed on a support is cured to form a cured layer, a resist layer is formed on the cured layer, the resist layer is patterned into a lens shape, and the cured layer is dry etched using the patterned resist layer as a mask to transfer the lens shape to the cured layer.
  • Lenses can be manufactured by using the transfer method in the methods described in JP 2006-073605 A, JP 2006-190903 A, JP 2008-281414 A, JP 2014-029524 A, and the like, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • a mold having a pattern is pressed onto a composition layer formed on a support, the composition layer is sandwiched between the mold and the support, the composition layer is exposed to light in this sandwiched state and cured, and then the mold is peeled off from the support to produce the product.
  • a composition layer formed on a support is cured to form a cured layer, which is then heated to cause thermal dripping of the surface of the cured layer, allowing the cured layer to be processed into a lens shape.
  • the process of processing into a lens shape may include a process of exposing the composition layer to light. Exposure is used as a curing process for the composition layer. Exposure is preferably performed by irradiating the composition layer with radiation. Examples of radiation include g-line and i-line. Light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light with a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used. Examples of light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less include KrF line (wavelength 248 nm) and ArF line (wavelength 193 nm), with KrF line (wavelength 248 nm) being preferred. Long-wavelength light sources of 300 nm or more can also be used.
  • Pulse exposure is an exposure method in which light is applied and paused repeatedly in short cycles (e.g., milliseconds or less).
  • the irradiation amount is, for example, preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J/cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J/cm 2.
  • the oxygen concentration during exposure can be appropriately selected, and in addition to being performed under air, exposure may be performed under a low-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of 19 volume% or less (e.g., 15 volume%, 5 volume%, or substantially oxygen-free), or under a high-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of more than 21 volume% (e.g., 22 volume%, 30 volume%, or 50 volume%).
  • the exposure illuminance can be appropriately set, and can usually be selected from the range of 1000 W/m 2 to 100,000 W/m 2 (e.g., 5,000 W/m 2 , 15,000 W/m 2 , or 35,000 W/m 2 ).
  • the oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined.
  • the oxygen concentration can be 10% by volume and the illuminance can be 10,000 W/m 2
  • the oxygen concentration can be 35% by volume and the illuminance can be 20,000 W/m 2 .
  • the optical member of the present invention can be used for a solid-state imaging device.
  • the configuration of the solid-state imaging device is not particularly limited as long as it includes the optical member of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device. For example, the following configurations can be mentioned.
  • the optical element of the present invention has a structure in which a substrate is provided with a plurality of photodiodes constituting the light receiving area of a solid-state imaging element (such as a CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor or a CMOS (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor) image sensor) and a transfer electrode made of polysilicon or the like, a light-shielding film is provided on the photodiodes and the transfer electrode with only the light receiving portion of the photodiode being opened, a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light-shielding film so as to cover the entire light-shielding film and the light receiving portion of the photodiode, and a color filter is provided on the device protective film.
  • a solid-state imaging element such as a CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor or a CMOS (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor) image sensor
  • a transfer electrode made of polysilicon or the like
  • the optical element of the present invention can be provided on the device protective film below the color filter (the side closer to the substrate) or on the color filter.
  • a microlens can be provided on the color filter.
  • the color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partitions, for example in a lattice pattern. In this case, it is preferable that the partitions have a lower refractive index than each colored pixel.
  • imaging devices having such a structure include the devices described in JP 2012-227478 A, JP 2014-179577 A, and WO 2018/043654 A.
  • an ultraviolet absorbing layer may be provided in the structure of the solid-state imaging element to improve light resistance.
  • Imaging devices equipped with solid-state imaging elements can be used for digital cameras, electronic devices with imaging functions (such as mobile phones), as well as in-vehicle cameras and surveillance cameras.
  • the optical member of the present invention can be used in an image display device.
  • image display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence display devices.
  • the definition of an image display device and details of each image display device are described, for example, in "Electronic Display Devices” (written by Akio Sasaki, published by Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd. in 1990) and “Display Devices” (written by Junsho Ibuki, published by Sangyo Tosho Co., Ltd. in 1989).
  • Liquid crystal display devices are described, for example, in “Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology” (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, published by Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd. in 1994).
  • the present invention can be applied to various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the above-mentioned "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology.”
  • P-1 TiO2 particles (transparent or white particles, average primary particle size 20 nm)
  • P-2 ZrO2 particles (transparent or white particles, average primary particle size 50 nm)
  • D-1 Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios, and the numbers attached to the side chains are the numbers of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 24,000, acid value: 48.7 mgKOH/g)
  • D-2 Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios, and the numbers attached to the side chains are the numbers of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 20,000, acid value: 70.1 mgKOH/g)
  • D-3 (The numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios, and the numbers attached to the side chains are the numbers of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 23,000, acid value: 61.4 mgKOH/g)
  • Dispersions 1 to 4 Dispersions 1 to 4 described above
  • M-1 A mixture of compounds having the following structure (a mixture of the compound on the left and the compound on the right in a molar ratio of 7:3)
  • M-2 A mixture of compounds having the following structure (a mixture of the compounds on the left and right in a molar ratio of 45:55)
  • M-3 Compound having the following structure
  • M-4 Compound having the following structure
  • M-5 Compound having the following structure
  • binder B-1 40% by mass solution of a resin having the following structure (the numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight 14,000, acid value 79.3 mgKOH/g) in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
  • B-2 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure (the numerical values added to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight 11,000, acid value 31.8 mgKOH/g)
  • B-3 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units; weight average molecular weight 20,000, acid value 70.1 mgKOH/g)
  • B-4 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units; weight average molecular weight 2
  • SH-1 Compound having the following structure (a multifunctional thiol compound having two secondary thiol groups)
  • SH-2 Compound having the following structure (a multifunctional thiol compound having three secondary thiol groups)
  • SH-3 Compound having the following structure (a multifunctional thiol compound having three secondary thiol groups)
  • SH-4 Compound having the following structure (a multifunctional thiol compound having four secondary thiol groups)
  • SH-5 Compound having the following structure (a polyfunctional thiol compound having four primary thiol groups)
  • SH-6 Compound having the following structure (a polyfunctional thiol compound having two primary thiol groups)
  • SH-7 Compound having the following structure (a polyfunctional thiol compound having three primary thiol groups)
  • SH-8 Compound having the following structure (a polyfunctional thiol compound having three primary thiol groups)
  • SH-9 Compound having the following structure (a multifunctional thiol compound having six primary thiol groups)
  • Each curable composition was applied onto a glass substrate by spin coating, then heat-treated (pre-baked) at 100°C for 120 seconds using a hot plate, then exposed to i-line at an exposure dose of 1000mJ/ cm2 , and then heated at 220°C for 5 minutes to produce a film with a thickness of 0.6 ⁇ m.
  • a SiO2 film with a thickness of 100nm was formed on the surface of the film formed on the glass substrate by chemical vapor deposition deposition to produce a test specimen.
  • the transmittance of the produced test specimen in the wavelength range of 400 to 700nm was measured using a spectrometer (Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd., MCPD-9800).
  • the test specimen was placed in a thermohygrostat (EHS-221M, manufactured by Yamato Scientific Co., Ltd.) and left to stand for 500 hours, 1000 hours, and 2000 hours in an atmosphere of a temperature of 85° C. and a relative humidity of 85%, for a reliability test.
  • the test specimen was measured for transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm using a spectrometer (MCPD-9800, manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.).
  • MCPD-9800 manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
  • the maximum change in transmittance means the change in the wavelength at which the change in transmittance of the test specimen before and after the reliability test is the largest in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm.
  • ⁇ Vis was 0.2 mPa ⁇ s or less. 4: ⁇ Vis was greater than 0.2 mPa ⁇ s and less than 0.4 mPa ⁇ s. 3: ⁇ Vis was greater than 0.4 mPa ⁇ s and less than 0.6 mPa ⁇ s. 2: ⁇ Vis was greater than 0.6 mPa ⁇ s and less than 1.0 mPa ⁇ s. 1: ⁇ Vis was greater than 1.0 mPa ⁇ s.
  • a composition for underlayer (CT-4000, manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.) was applied by spin coating so that the film thickness was 0.1 ⁇ m, and heated at 220 ° C. for 1 hour using a hot plate to form an underlayer.
  • Each curable composition was applied by spin coating on the silicon wafer with the underlayer, and then heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate to form a composition layer.
  • the composition layer was exposed at an exposure dose of 100 mJ / cm 2 through a mask having a Bayer pattern of 0.8 ⁇ m square.
  • paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3 mass % aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide. Thereafter, rinsing with a spin shower and washing with pure water were performed, and further heating was performed at 230 ° C. for 5 minutes using a hot plate to form a pattern with a thickness of 0.6 ⁇ m and a line width of 10 ⁇ m square.
  • the silicon wafer on which the pattern was formed was observed by observing the top surface of the pattern using a scanning electron microscope (SEM) to evaluate the pattern shape. The closer the pattern area ratio shown below is to 1, the better the pattern shape is.
  • SEM scanning electron microscope
  • Pattern area ratio (area of formed pattern/area of rectangle circumscribing formed pattern) -Evaluation criteria- 5: The pattern area ratio is 0.950 or more and 1.000 or less. 4: The pattern area ratio is 0.900 or more and less than 0.950. 3: The pattern area ratio is 0.850 or more and less than 0.900. 2: The pattern area ratio is 0.800 or more and less than 0.850. 1: The pattern area ratio is less than 0.800.
  • ⁇ Transparency assessment> The curable composition was applied onto a glass substrate by spin coating and heated at 220° C. for 5 minutes to prepare a film having a thickness of 0.6 ⁇ m.
  • the transmittance of the obtained film in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm was measured using a spectrometer (MCPD-9800, manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.). The higher the transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm, the better the transparency.
  • the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is 50% or more and less than 75%.
  • the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is 30% or more and less than 50%.
  • the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is less than 30%.
  • the examples had excellent reliability ratings, and even when placed in a humid environment for a long period of time, they were able to form a cured product in which the occurrence of wrinkles on the surface of the adjacent layer was suppressed.
  • the curable compositions of the examples can be suitably used for microlenses.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Polymers With Sulfur, Phosphorus Or Metals In The Main Chain (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a curable composition containing: particles A that include at least one selected from TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles; a resin; a polymerizable compound; a photopolymerization initiator; and a polyfunctional thiol compound. Also provided are a cured product and an optical member, each using the above-described curable composition.

Description

硬化性組成物、硬化物および光学部材CURABLE COMPOSITION, CURED PRODUCT, AND OPTICAL MEMBER

 本発明は、TiO粒子およびZrO粒子から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む硬化性組成物に関する。また、本発明は、硬化性組成物を用いた硬化物および光学部材に関する。 The present invention relates to a curable composition containing at least one selected from TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles. The present invention also relates to a cured product and an optical component using the curable composition.

 従来より、電荷結合素子(CCD)イメージセンサなどの固体撮像素子においては、カラーフィルタを用いて画像のカラー化などの試みが行われている。また、カラーフィルタの光路上に、高屈折率の硬化物で構成されたマイクロレンズなどの光学部材を設けて、各カラーフィルタにおける画素の感度を高めることも行なわれている。  In the past, attempts have been made to colorize images using color filters in solid-state imaging devices such as charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensors. In addition, optical components such as microlenses made of a hardened material with a high refractive index have been placed on the light path of the color filter to increase the sensitivity of the pixels in each color filter.

 マイクロレンズなどの光学部材は、TiO粒子やZrO粒子などの屈折率の高い粒子を含む硬化性組成物を用いて製造されている。 Optical components such as microlenses have been manufactured using curable compositions containing high refractive index particles such as TiO2 particles or ZrO2 particles.

 特許文献1には、TiO粒子やZrO粒子などの粒子と、分散剤と、アルカリ可溶性樹脂と、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤と、溶剤とを含む感光性樹脂組成物に関する発明が開示されている。 Patent Document 1 discloses an invention related to a photosensitive resin composition containing particles such as TiO2 particles or ZrO2 particles, a dispersant, an alkali-soluble resin, a polymerizable compound, a photopolymerization initiator, and a solvent.

特開2019-203932号公報JP 2019-203932 A

 一般的に、マイクロレンズなどの光学部材は、他の部材上に積層したり、表面に他の層を積層して用いられる。例えば、マイクロレンズの場合、表面に無機膜などを形成して用いられることがある。 In general, optical components such as microlenses are used by laminating them on other components or by laminating other layers on their surfaces. For example, microlenses are sometimes used with inorganic films formed on their surfaces.

 本発明者が、TiO粒子やZrO粒子を含む硬化性組成物を用いて形成した硬化物について鋭意検討したところ、上記硬化物と、上記硬化物に接する他の層とを有する複合体を湿度の高い環境下に長期間置いた際に、上記硬化物の上記他の層と接する側の表面にシワが生じやすい傾向にあることが分かった。 The present inventors have conducted extensive studies on a cured product formed using a curable composition containing TiO2 particles or ZrO2 particles, and have found that when a composite having the cured product and another layer in contact with the cured product is left in a humid environment for a long period of time, wrinkles tend to form on the surface of the cured product in contact with the other layer.

 また、本発明者が特許文献1に開示された感光性樹脂組成物について検討したところ、この感光性樹脂組成物を用いて得られた硬化物においても、湿度の高い環境下に長期間置いた場合に、他の層と接する側の表面にシワが生じやすいことが分かった。 Furthermore, when the inventors investigated the photosensitive resin composition disclosed in Patent Document 1, they found that even in the cured product obtained using this photosensitive resin composition, wrinkles tend to form on the surface in contact with other layers when the product is left in a humid environment for a long period of time.

 よって、本発明の目的は、湿度の高い環境下に長期間置いた場合であっても、シワの発生の抑制された硬化物を形成することができる硬化性組成物を提供することにある。また、本発明の目的は、硬化物および光学部材を提供することにある。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a curable composition that can form a cured product in which the occurrence of wrinkles is suppressed even when the composition is left in a humid environment for a long period of time. Another object of the present invention is to provide a cured product and an optical component.

 本発明者の検討によれば、後述する硬化性組成物により上記目的を達成できることを見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。よって、本発明は以下を提供する。 The inventors have found through their research that the above object can be achieved by using the curable composition described below, and have completed the present invention. Therefore, the present invention provides the following.

 <1> TiO粒子およびZrO粒子から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む粒子Aと、
 樹脂と、
 重合性化合物と、
 光重合開始剤と、
 多官能チオール化合物と、を含む硬化性組成物。
 <2> 上記多官能チオール化合物は、1分子中に2級チオール基を2~4個有する化合物である、<1>に記載の硬化性組成物。
 <3> 上記粒子Aは、TiO粒子を含む、<1>または<2>に記載の硬化性組成物。
 <4> 上記粒子Aは、透明または白色の粒子である、<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 <5> 上記硬化性組成物の全固形分中における上記粒子Aの含有量が50~80質量%である、<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 <6> 上記硬化性組成物の全固形分中における上記多官能チオール化合物の含有量が0.1~5質量%である、<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 <7> 上記重合性化合物の100質量部に対して、上記光重合開始剤を10~45質量部含む、<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 <8> 上記多官能チオール化合物の100質量部に対して、上記光重合開始剤を100~2000質量部含む、<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 <9> 上記光重合開始剤は、オキシム化合物を含む、<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 <10> 上記光重合開始剤は、1分子中にオキシム基を2個以上有するオキシム化合物を含む、<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 <11> 上記樹脂は、グラフト鎖および酸基を有する樹脂を含む、<1>~<10>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 <12> 更に、環状エーテル基を有する化合物を含む、<1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 <13> 上記硬化性組成物を用い、220℃で5分加熱して厚さ0.4~1.0μmの膜を形成した際に、上記膜の波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率の最小値が75%以上である、<1>~<12>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物。
 <14> <1>~<13>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物を用いて得られる硬化物。
 <15> <1>~<13>のいずれか1つに記載の硬化性組成物を用いて得られる光学部材。
 <16> 上記光学部材は、マイクロレンズである、<15>に記載の光学部材。
<1> Particles A including at least one selected from TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles;
Resin and
A polymerizable compound,
A photopolymerization initiator;
A curable composition comprising: a polyfunctional thiol compound.
<2> The curable composition according to <1>, wherein the polyfunctional thiol compound is a compound having 2 to 4 secondary thiol groups in one molecule.
<3> The curable composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the particle A contains TiO2 particles.
<4> The curable composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the particles A are transparent or white particles.
<5> The curable composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the content of the particles A in the total solid content of the curable composition is 50 to 80 mass %.
<6> The curable composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the content of the polyfunctional thiol compound in the total solid content of the curable composition is 0.1 to 5 mass%.
<7> The curable composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, further comprising 10 to 45 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator relative to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.
<8> The curable composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, further comprising 100 to 2,000 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator relative to 100 parts by mass of the polyfunctional thiol compound.
<9> The curable composition according to any one of <1> to <8>, wherein the photopolymerization initiator contains an oxime compound.
<10> The curable composition according to any one of <1> to <9>, wherein the photopolymerization initiator contains an oxime compound having two or more oxime groups in one molecule.
<11> The curable composition according to any one of <1> to <10>, wherein the resin includes a resin having a graft chain and an acid group.
<12> The curable composition according to any one of <1> to <11>, further comprising a compound having a cyclic ether group.
<13> The curable composition according to any one of <1> to <12>, in which, when the curable composition is used to form a film having a thickness of 0.4 to 1.0 μm by heating at 220° C. for 5 minutes, the film has a minimum transmittance of 75% or more in a wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm.
<14> A cured product obtained by using the curable composition according to any one of <1> to <13>.
<15> An optical member obtained by using the curable composition according to any one of <1> to <13>.
<16> The optical member according to <15>, which is a microlens.

 本発明によれば、湿度の高い環境下に長期間置いた場合であっても、シワの発生の抑制された硬化物を形成することができる硬化性組成物を提供することができる。また、本発明は、硬化物および光学部材を提供することができる。 The present invention provides a curable composition that can form a cured product that is less susceptible to wrinkles even when left in a humid environment for a long period of time. The present invention also provides a cured product and an optical component.

 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書において、「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も露光に含める。また、露光に用いられる光としては、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線または放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
 本明細書において、構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)法により測定したポリスチレン換算値である。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
The present invention will be described in detail below.
In this specification, the use of "to" means that the numerical values before and after it are included as the lower limit and upper limit.
In the description of groups (atomic groups) in this specification, when there is no indication of whether they are substituted or unsubstituted, the term encompasses both unsubstituted groups (atomic groups) and substituted groups (atomic groups). For example, the term "alkyl group" encompasses not only alkyl groups that have no substituents (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also alkyl groups that have substituents (substituted alkyl groups).
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the term "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. Examples of light used for exposure include the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet light represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet light (EUV light), X-rays, active rays or radiation such as electron beams.
In this specification, "(meth)acrylate" refers to both or either of acrylate and methacrylate, "(meth)acrylic" refers to both or either of acrylic and methacrylic, and "(meth)acryloyl" refers to both or either of acryloyl and methacryloyl.
In this specification, in the structural formulae, Me represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
In this specification, the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are values calculated as polystyrene standards measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
In this specification, the total solids content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
In this specification, the term "process" refers not only to an independent process, but also to a process that cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes, as long as the process achieves its intended effect.

<硬化性組成物>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、
 TiO粒子およびZrO粒子から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む粒子Aと、
 樹脂と、
 重合性化合物と、
 光重合開始剤と、
 多官能チオール化合物と、を含むことを特徴とする。
<Curable Composition>
The curable composition of the present invention comprises
Particles A containing at least one selected from TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles;
Resin and
A polymerizable compound,
A photopolymerization initiator;
and a polyfunctional thiol compound.

 TiO粒子やZrO粒子は、屈折率が高い粒子であるため、このような粒子を含む硬化性組成物を露光して硬化する場合、露光時に露光光が粒子によって散乱したり、露光光が膜の底部まで十分に到達しないことがあり、重合性化合物の重合反応などが不十分な傾向にある。本発明の硬化性組成物は、多官能チオール化合物を含むことにより、TiO粒子やZrO粒子を含むものであるにもかかわらず、露光によって、重合性化合物の重合反応などを十分に進行させることができると推測される。このため、本発明の硬化性組成物は、湿度の高い環境下に長期間置いた場合であっても、シワの発生の抑制された硬化物を形成することができる。より具体的には、湿度の高い環境下に長期間置いた場合であっても、隣接する他の層側の表面におけるシワの発生が抑制された硬化物を形成することができる。 Since TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles have a high refractive index, when a curable composition containing such particles is exposed to light and cured, the exposure light may be scattered by the particles during exposure, or the exposure light may not reach the bottom of the film sufficiently, and the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound tends to be insufficient. It is presumed that the curable composition of the present invention, which contains a multifunctional thiol compound, can sufficiently promote the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound by exposure, even though it contains TiO2 particles or ZrO2 particles. Therefore, the curable composition of the present invention can form a cured product in which the occurrence of wrinkles is suppressed even if it is placed in a humid environment for a long period of time. More specifically, it can form a cured product in which the occurrence of wrinkles is suppressed on the surface of the adjacent other layer side even if it is placed in a humid environment for a long period of time.

 本発明の硬化性組成物を用いて220℃で5分加熱して厚さ0.4~1.0μmの膜を形成した際に、上記膜の波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率の最小値は75%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、85%以上であることが更に好ましく、90%であることが特に好ましい。また、上記膜の波長400~700nmの範囲の平均透過率は75%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、85%以上であることが更に好ましく、90%であることが特に好ましい。 When the curable composition of the present invention is heated at 220°C for 5 minutes to form a film having a thickness of 0.4 to 1.0 μm, the minimum transmittance of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and especially preferably 90%. The average transmittance of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and especially preferably 90%.

 本発明の硬化性組成物の固形分濃度は、5~30質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、7.5質量%以上が好ましく、10質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、25質量%以下が好ましく、20質量%以下がより好ましく、15質量%以下が更に好ましい。 The solids concentration of the curable composition of the present invention is preferably 5 to 30% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 7.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less.

 以下、本発明の硬化性組成物に用いられる各成分について説明する。 The components used in the curable composition of the present invention are described below.

<<粒子A>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、TiO粒子およびZrO粒子から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む粒子Aを含む。
<<Particle A>>
The curable composition of the present invention contains particles A which contain at least one kind selected from TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles.

 TiO粒子およびZrO粒子の平均一次粒子径は、10~200nmであることが好ましい。上限は、150nm以下であることが好ましく、100nm以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、15nm以上であることが好ましい。 The average primary particle size of the TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles is preferably 10 to 200 nm. The upper limit is preferably 150 nm or less, more preferably 100 nm or less. The lower limit is preferably 15 nm or more.

 なお、本明細書において、粒子の平均一次粒子径は以下の方法で測定した値である。すなわち、粒子の一次粒子径は、粒子を透過型電子顕微鏡(TEM)で観察し、粒子が凝集していない部分(一次粒子)を観測することで求めることができる。一次粒子の粒度分布については、一次粒子を、透過型電子顕微鏡を用いて透過型電子顕微鏡写真を撮影した後、その写真を用いて画像処理装置で粒度分布を測定して求めることができる。本明細書において、粒子の平均一次粒子径は、一次粒子の粒度分布から算出された個数基準の算術平均径を平均一次粒子径とした。本明細書では、透過型電子顕微鏡として(株)日立製作所製電子顕微鏡(H-7000)を用い、画像処理装置として(株)ニレコ製ルーゼックスAPを用いる。 In this specification, the average primary particle diameter of the particles is a value measured by the following method. That is, the primary particle diameter of the particles can be obtained by observing the particles with a transmission electron microscope (TEM) and observing the parts where the particles are not aggregated (primary particles). The particle size distribution of the primary particles can be obtained by taking a transmission electron micrograph of the primary particles with a transmission electron microscope, and then measuring the particle size distribution using the photograph with an image processing device. In this specification, the average primary particle diameter of the particles is defined as the arithmetic mean diameter on a number basis calculated from the particle size distribution of the primary particles. In this specification, an electron microscope (H-7000) manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd. is used as the transmission electron microscope, and Luzex AP manufactured by Nireco Corporation is used as the image processing device.

 TiO粒子およびZrO粒子は、白色または透明の粒子であることが好ましい。また、粒子Aは、白色または透明の粒子であることが好ましい。 The TiO2 particles and the ZrO2 particles are preferably white or transparent particles. Also, the particles A are preferably white or transparent particles.

 粒子Aは、TiO粒子を含むものであることが好ましい。
 粒子Aは、TiO粒子およびZrO粒子から選ばれる少なくとも1種を70質量%以上含むことが好ましく、80質量%以上含むことがより好ましく、90質量%以上含むことが更に好ましく、95質量%以上含むことが特に好ましい。上限は、100質量%とすることができる。
 なかでも、粒子Aは、TiO粒子を70質量%以上含むことが好ましく、80質量%以上含むことがより好ましく、90質量%以上含むことが更に好ましく、95質量%以上含むことが特に好ましい。上限は、100質量%とすることができる。
It is preferred that particles A comprise TiO2 particles.
Particle A preferably contains at least one selected from TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles in an amount of 70% by mass or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more, even more preferably 90% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 95% by mass or more. The upper limit can be 100% by mass.
In particular, the particles A preferably contain 70% by mass or more of TiO2 particles , more preferably 80% by mass or more, even more preferably 90% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 95% by mass or more. The upper limit can be 100% by mass.

 硬化性組成物の全固形分中における粒子Aの含有量は50~80質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、75質量%以下であることが好ましく、70質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、55質量%以上であることが好ましく、60質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 The content of particles A in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 50 to 80 mass%. The upper limit is preferably 75 mass% or less, and more preferably 70 mass% or less. The lower limit is preferably 55 mass% or more, and more preferably 60 mass% or more.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、粒子Aを、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。粒子Aを2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of particle A, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types of particle A are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.

<<樹脂>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、樹脂を含む。樹脂は、例えば、粒子などを硬化性組成物中で分散させる用途や、バインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に粒子などを硬化性組成物中で分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。ただし、樹脂のこのような用途は一例であって、このような用途以外を目的として樹脂を使用することもできる。
<<Resin>>
The curable composition of the present invention contains a resin. The resin is blended, for example, for dispersing particles in the curable composition or for use as a binder. Note that a resin used mainly for dispersing particles in the curable composition is also called a dispersant. However, such uses of the resin are merely examples, and the resin can also be used for purposes other than such uses.

 樹脂としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、(メタ)アクリルアミド樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、シロキサン樹脂などが挙げられる。また、樹脂としては、国際公開第2022/065215号の段落番号0091~0099に記載の樹脂、特開2016-222891号公報に記載されたブロックポリイソシアネート樹脂、特開2020-122052号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-111656号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-139021号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-138503号公報に記載の主鎖に環構造を有する構成単位と側鎖にビフェニル基を有する構成単位とを含む樹脂、特開2020-186373号公報の段落0199~0233に記載の樹脂、特開2020-186325号公報に記載のアルカリ可溶性樹脂、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0078339号公報に記載の式1で表される樹脂、国際公開第2022/030445号に記載のエポキシ基と酸基を含む共重合体、特開2018-135514号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2020-041046号公報に記載の共重合体、特開2023-033156号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2023-030386号公報に記載の樹脂、特開2023-027753号公報に記載の樹脂を用いることもできる。 Examples of resins include (meth)acrylic resins, epoxy resins, (meth)acrylamide resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyimide resins, polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, and siloxane resins. Further, examples of the resin include the resin described in paragraphs 0091 to 0099 of WO 2022/065215, the blocked polyisocyanate resin described in JP 2016-222891 A, the resin described in JP 2020-122052 A, the resin described in JP 2020-111656 A, the resin described in JP 2020-139021 A, the resin described in JP 2017-138503 A containing a structural unit having a ring structure in the main chain and a structural unit having a biphenyl group in the side chain, and the resin described in paragraphs 0199 to 0199 of JP 2020-186373 A. Resins described in JP-A-0233, alkali-soluble resins described in JP-A-2020-186325, resins represented by formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0078339, copolymers containing epoxy groups and acid groups described in WO 2022/030445, resins described in JP-A-2018-135514, copolymers described in JP-A-2020-041046, resins described in JP-A-2023-033156, resins described in JP-A-2023-030386, and resins described in JP-A-2023-027753 can also be used.

 樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、3000~2000000が好ましい。上限は、1000000以下が好ましく、500000以下がより好ましい。下限は、4000以上が好ましく、5000以上がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin is preferably 3,000 to 2,000,000. The upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, and more preferably 500,000 or less. The lower limit is preferably 4,000 or more, and more preferably 5,000 or more.

 樹脂としては、酸基を有する樹脂を用いることが好ましい。酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。 As the resin, it is preferable to use a resin having an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a phosphate group, a sulfo group, and a phenolic hydroxy group.

 酸基を有する樹脂の酸価は、30~500mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、40mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、50mgKOH/g以上が特に好ましい。上限は、400mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、300mgKOH/g以下が更に好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下が特に好ましい。酸基を有する樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、5000~100000が好ましく、5000~50000がより好ましい。また、酸基を有する樹脂の数平均分子量(Mn)は、1000~20000が好ましい。 The acid value of the resin having acid groups is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH/g. The lower limit is more preferably 40 mgKOH/g or more, and particularly preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more. The upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, even more preferably 300 mgKOH/g or less, and particularly preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, and more preferably 5,000 to 50,000. The number average molecular weight (Mn) of the resin having acid groups is preferably 1,000 to 20,000.

 酸基を有する樹脂は、酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましく、酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を樹脂の全繰り返し単位中5~70モル%含むことがより好ましい。酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量の上限は、50モル%以下であることが好ましく、30モル%以下であることがより好ましい。酸基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量の下限は、10モル%以上であることが好ましく、20モル%以上であることがより好ましい。 The resin having an acid group preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group on the side chain, and more preferably contains 5 to 70 mol% of the repeating units having an acid group on the side chain out of all the repeating units of the resin. The upper limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group on the side chain is preferably 50 mol% or less, and more preferably 30 mol% or less. The lower limit of the content of repeating units having an acid group on the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, and more preferably 20 mol% or more.

 酸基を有する樹脂については、特開2012-208494号公報の段落番号0558~0571(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の段落番号0685~0700)の記載、特開2012-198408号公報の段落番号0076~0099の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、酸基を有する樹脂は市販品を用いることもできる。また、樹脂への酸基の導入方法としては、特に制限はないが、例えば、特許第6349629号公報に記載の方法が挙げられる。更に、樹脂への酸基の導入方法としては、エポキシ基の開環反応で生じたヒドロキシ基に酸無水物を反応させて酸基を導入する方法も挙げられる。 For the resin having an acid group, the description in paragraphs 0558 to 0571 of JP 2012-208494 A (corresponding paragraphs 0685 to 0700 of the specification of US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099) and the description in paragraphs 0076 to 0099 of JP 2012-198408 A can be referred to, and the contents of these are incorporated herein. In addition, a commercially available product can also be used as the resin having an acid group. In addition, there is no particular restriction on the method of introducing an acid group into the resin, but an example of the method is the method described in Japanese Patent No. 6349629 A. Furthermore, as a method of introducing an acid group into a resin, a method of reacting an acid anhydride with a hydroxyl group generated by a ring-opening reaction of an epoxy group to introduce an acid group can also be used.

 樹脂としては、塩基性基を有する樹脂を用いることもできる。塩基性基を有する樹脂は、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることが好ましく、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位と塩基性基を含まない繰り返し単位とを有する共重合体であることがより好ましく、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位と、塩基性基を含まない繰り返し単位とを有するブロック共重合体であることが更に好ましい。塩基性基を有する樹脂は分散剤として用いることもできる。塩基性基を有する樹脂のアミン価は、5~300mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、10mgKOH/g以上が好ましく、20mgKOH/g以上がより好ましい。上限は、200mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、100mgKOH/g以下がより好ましい。 As the resin, a resin having a basic group can also be used. The resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain, more preferably a copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not having a basic group, and even more preferably a block copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group in the side chain and a repeating unit not having a basic group. The resin having a basic group can also be used as a dispersant. The amine value of the resin having a basic group is preferably 5 to 300 mgKOH/g. The lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH/g or more. The upper limit is preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less.

 塩基性基を有する樹脂の市販品としては、DISPERBYK-161、162、163、164、166、167、168、174、182、183、184、185、2000、2001、2050、2150、2163、2164、BYK-LPN6919(以上、ビックケミー社製)、ソルスパース11200、13240、13650、13940、24000、26000、28000、32000、32500、32550、32600、33000、34750、35100、35200、37500、38500、39000、53095、56000、7100(以上、日本ルーブリゾール社製)、Efka PX 4300、4330、4046、4060、4080(以上、BASF社製)等が挙げられる。また、塩基性基を有する樹脂は、特開2014-219665号公報の段落番号0063~0112に記載されたブロック共重合体(B)、特開2018-156021号公報の段落番号0046~0076に記載されたブロック共重合体A1、特開2019-184763号公報の段落番号0150~0153に記載された塩基性基を有するビニル樹脂を用いることもでき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Commercially available resins with basic groups include DISPERBYK-161, 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 174, 182, 183, 184, 185, 2000, 2001, 2050, 2150, 2163, 2164, BYK-LPN6919 (all manufactured by BYK-Chemie), Solsperse 11200, 13240, 13650, 13940, 24 000, 26000, 28000, 32000, 32500, 32550, 32600, 33000, 34750, 35100, 35200, 37500, 38500, 39000, 53095, 56000, 7100 (all manufactured by Lubrizol Japan), Efka PX 4300, 4330, 4046, 4060, 4080 (all manufactured by BASF), and the like. In addition, the resin having a basic group may be a block copolymer (B) described in paragraphs 0063 to 0112 of JP 2014-219665 A, a block copolymer A1 described in paragraphs 0046 to 0076 of JP 2018-156021 A, or a vinyl resin having a basic group described in paragraphs 0150 to 0153 of JP 2019-184763 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 樹脂は、酸基を有する樹脂と塩基性基を有する樹脂とを用いることも好ましい。この態様によれば、硬化性組成物の保存安定性をより向上できる。酸基を有する樹脂と塩基性基を有する樹脂とを併用する場合、塩基性基を有する樹脂の含有量は、酸基を有する樹脂の100質量部に対して20~500質量部であることが好ましく、30~300質量部であることがより好ましく、50~200質量部であることが更に好ましい。 It is also preferable to use a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group. According to this embodiment, the storage stability of the curable composition can be further improved. When a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group are used in combination, the content of the resin having a basic group is preferably 20 to 500 parts by mass, more preferably 30 to 300 parts by mass, and even more preferably 50 to 200 parts by mass per 100 parts by mass of the resin having an acid group.

 樹脂としては、芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂を用いることも好ましい。芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂において、芳香族カルボキシ基は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていてもよく、繰り返し単位の側鎖に含まれていてもよい。芳香族カルボキシ基は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていることが好ましい。なお、本明細書において、芳香族カルボキシ基とは、芳香族環にカルボキシ基が1個以上結合した構造の基のことである。芳香族カルボキシ基において、芳香族環に結合したカルボキシ基の数は、1~4個であることが好ましく、1~2個であることがより好ましい。芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂としては、国際公開第2021/166858号の段落0082~0107に記載された樹脂が挙げられる。 As the resin, it is also preferable to use a resin having an aromatic carboxy group. In a resin having an aromatic carboxy group, the aromatic carboxy group may be included in the main chain of a repeating unit, or may be included in a side chain of the repeating unit. It is preferable that the aromatic carboxy group is included in the main chain of a repeating unit. In this specification, an aromatic carboxy group refers to a group having a structure in which one or more carboxy groups are bonded to an aromatic ring. In an aromatic carboxy group, the number of carboxy groups bonded to an aromatic ring is preferably 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 to 2. Examples of resins having an aromatic carboxy group include the resins described in paragraphs 0082 to 0107 of WO 2021/166858.

 樹脂としては、架橋性基を有する樹脂を用いることも好ましい。架橋性基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基、エポキシ基およびオキセタニル基などが挙げられる。架橋性基を有する樹脂を用いる場合、硬化性組成物に含まれる樹脂中における架橋性基を有する樹脂の含有量は、30質量%以上であることが好ましく、50質量%以上であることがより好ましく、70質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。 As the resin, it is also preferable to use a resin having a crosslinkable group. Examples of the crosslinkable group include a (meth)acryloyl group, an epoxy group, and an oxetanyl group. When a resin having a crosslinkable group is used, the content of the resin having a crosslinkable group in the resin contained in the curable composition is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and even more preferably 70% by mass or more.

 樹脂としては、酸基およびグラフト鎖を有する樹脂(以下、酸性グラフト樹脂ともいう)を用いることが好ましい。酸性グラフト樹脂は、バインダーとして用いてもよく、分散剤として用いてもよい。なお、本明細書において、グラフト鎖とは、繰り返し単位の主鎖から枝分かれして伸びるポリマー鎖のことを意味する。グラフト鎖としては、水素原子を除いた原子数が40~10000であることが好ましく、水素原子を除いた原子数が50~2000であることがより好ましく、水素原子を除いた原子数が60~500であることが更に好ましい。 As the resin, it is preferable to use a resin having an acid group and a graft chain (hereinafter, also referred to as an acidic graft resin). The acidic graft resin may be used as a binder or a dispersant. In this specification, the graft chain means a polymer chain that branches out from the main chain of the repeating unit. The graft chain preferably has 40 to 10,000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, more preferably 50 to 2,000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, and even more preferably 60 to 500 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms.

 グラフト鎖は、ポリエーテル構造、ポリエステル構造、ポリ(メタ)アクリル構造、ポリスチレン構造、ポリウレタン構造、ポリウレア構造およびポリアミド構造から選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造の繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましく、ポリエーテル構造、ポリエステル構造、ポリ(メタ)アクリル構造およびポリスチレン構造から選ばれる少なくとも1種の構造の繰り返し単位を含むことがより好ましく、ポリエーテル構造またはポリエステル構造の繰り返し単位を含むことが更に好ましく、ポリエステル構造の繰り返し単位を含むことが特に好ましい。 The graft chain preferably contains repeating units of at least one structure selected from a polyether structure, a polyester structure, a poly(meth)acrylic structure, a polystyrene structure, a polyurethane structure, a polyurea structure, and a polyamide structure, more preferably contains repeating units of at least one structure selected from a polyether structure, a polyester structure, a poly(meth)acrylic structure, and a polystyrene structure, even more preferably contains repeating units of a polyether structure or a polyester structure, and particularly preferably contains repeating units of a polyester structure.

 ポリエステル構造の繰り返し単位としては、式(G-1)、式(G-4)または式(G-5)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。ポリエーテル構造の繰り返し単位としては、式(G-2)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。ポリ(メタ)アクリル構造の繰り返し単位としては、式(G-3)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。ポリスチレン構造の繰り返し単位としては、式(G-6)で表される構造の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Examples of the repeating unit of the polyester structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-1), formula (G-4) or formula (G-5). Examples of the repeating unit of the polyether structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-2). Examples of the repeating unit of the poly(meth)acrylic structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-3). Examples of the repeating unit of the polystyrene structure include a repeating unit of the structure represented by formula (G-6).

 上記式において、RG1およびRG2は、それぞれ独立してアルキレン基を表す。RG1およびRG2が表すアルキレン基としては特に制限されないが、炭素数1~20の直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数2~16の直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数3~12の直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキレン基が更に好ましい。 In the above formula, R G1 and R G2 each independently represent an alkylene group. The alkylene group represented by R G1 and R G2 is not particularly limited, but is preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.

 上記式において、RG3は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、QG1は、-O-または-NH-を表し、LG1は、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、RG4は、水素原子または置換基を表す。
 LG1が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレン基)、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のアルキレンオキシ基)、オキシアルキレンカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~12のオキシアルキレンカルボニル基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、OCO-、-S-およびこれらの2以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。
 RG4が表す置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、ヘテロアリールチオエーテル基、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基およびブロックイソシアネート基等が挙げられる。
In the above formula, R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, Q G1 represents --O-- or --NH--, L G1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L G1 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkyleneoxy group (preferably an alkyleneoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group (preferably an oxyalkylenecarbonyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, OCO-, -S-, and groups formed by combining two or more of these.
Examples of the substituent represented by R G4 include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, a heteroarylthioether group, an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, and a blocked isocyanate group.

 RG5は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、RG6はアリール基を表す。RG6が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。RG6が表すアリール基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、ヘテロアリールチオエーテル基、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基およびブロックイソシアネート基等が挙げられる。 R G5 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R G6 represents an aryl group. The number of carbon atoms of the aryl group represented by R G6 is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and still more preferably 6 to 12. The aryl group represented by R G6 may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, a heteroarylthioether group, an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, and a blocked isocyanate group.

 グラフト鎖の末端構造としては、特に限定されない。水素原子であってもよく、置換基であってもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、ヘテロアリールチオエーテル基等が挙げられる。なかでも、粒子の分散性等の観点から、立体反発効果を有する基であることが好ましく、炭素数5~24のアルキル基又はアルコキシ基であることが好ましい。アルキル基およびアルコキシ基は、直鎖、分岐、及び、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。 The terminal structure of the graft chain is not particularly limited. It may be a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, and a heteroarylthioether group. From the viewpoint of particle dispersibility, etc., it is preferable that the group has a steric repulsion effect, and it is preferable that the group is an alkyl group or an alkoxy group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms. The alkyl group and the alkoxy group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, and is preferably linear or branched.

 グラフト鎖としては、下記式(G-1a)、式(G-2a)、式(G-3a)、式(G-4a)、式(G-5a)または式(G-6a)で表される構造であることが好ましく、式(G-1a)、式(G-4a)または式(G-5a)で表される構造であることがより好ましい。
The graft chain is preferably a structure represented by the following formula (G-1a), (G-2a), (G-3a), (G-4a), (G-5a) or (G-6a), and more preferably a structure represented by formula (G-1a), (G-4a) or (G-5a).

 上記式において、RG1およびRG2は、それぞれアルキレン基を表し、RG3は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、QG1は、-O-または-NH-を表し、LG1は、単結合または2価の連結基を表し、RG4は、水素原子または置換基を表し、RG5は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、RG6はアリール基を表し、W100は水素原子または置換基を表し、n1~n6は、それぞれ独立して2以上の整数を表す。RG1~RG6、QG1、LG1については、式(G-1)~(G-6)で説明したRG1~RG6、QG1、LG1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In the above formula, R G1 and R G2 each represent an alkylene group, R G3 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, Q G1 represents -O- or -NH-, L G1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, R G4 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R G5 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R G6 represents an aryl group, W 100 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and n1 to n6 each independently represent an integer of 2 or more. R G1 to R G6 , Q G1 , and L G1 are synonymous with R G1 to R G6 , Q G1 , and L G1 described in formulas (G-1) to (G-6), and the preferred ranges are also the same.

 式(G-1a)~(G-6a)において、W100は置換基であることが好ましい。置換基としては、上述した置換基が挙げられる。 In formulae (G-1a) to (G-6a), W 100 is preferably a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the above-mentioned substituents.

 式(G-1a)~(G-6a)において、n1~n6は、それぞれ2~100の整数が好ましく、2~80の整数がより好ましく、8~60の整数が更に好ましい。 In formulas (G-1a) to (G-6a), n1 to n6 are each preferably an integer from 2 to 100, more preferably an integer from 2 to 80, and even more preferably an integer from 8 to 60.

 式(G-1a)において、n1が2以上の場合における各繰り返し単位中のRG1同士は、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。また、RG1が異なる繰り返し単位を2種以上含む場合においては、各繰り返し単位の配列は特に限定は無く、ランダム、交互、及び、ブロックのいずれであってもよい。式(G-2a)~式(G-6a)においても同様である。また、グラフト鎖は、式(G-1a)、式(G-4a)または式(G-5a)で表される構造であって、RG1が異なる繰り返し単位を2種以上含む構造であることも好ましい。 In formula (G-1a), when n1 is 2 or more, R G1 in each repeating unit may be the same or different. When R G1 contains two or more different repeating units, the arrangement of each repeating unit is not particularly limited and may be random, alternating, or block. The same applies to formulas (G-2a) to (G-6a). In addition, it is also preferable that the graft chain has a structure represented by formula (G-1a), formula (G-4a), or formula (G-5a) and contains two or more different repeating units in R G1 .

 酸性グラフト樹脂は、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を有する樹脂であることが好ましい。グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(e3)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
The acidic graft resin is preferably a resin having a repeating unit having a graft chain. An example of the repeating unit having a graft chain is a repeating unit represented by formula (e3).

 式中、Ae30は3価の連結基を表し、Le30は単結合または2価の連結基を表し、We30はグラフト鎖を表す。 In the formula, A e30 represents a trivalent linking group, L e30 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and W e30 represents a graft chain.

 Ae30が表す3価の連結基としては、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基、ポリアルキレンイミン系連結基、ポリエステル系連結基、ポリウレタン系連結基、ポリウレア系連結基、ポリアミド系連結基、ポリエーテル系連結基、ポリスチレン系連結基などが挙げられ、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基またはポリアルキレンイミン系連結基であることが好ましく、ポリ(メタ)アクリル系連結基であることがより好ましい。 Examples of the trivalent linking group represented by A e30 include a poly(meth)acrylic linking group, a polyalkyleneimine linking group, a polyester linking group, a polyurethane linking group, a polyurea linking group, a polyamide linking group, a polyether linking group, and a polystyrene linking group. A poly(meth)acrylic linking group or a polyalkyleneimine linking group is preferable, and a poly(meth)acrylic linking group is more preferable.

 Le30が表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキレン基)、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20のアリーレン基)、-NH-、-SO-、-SO-、-CO-、-O-、-COO-、OCO-、-CONRx3-、-S-およびこれら基の2以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。Rx3は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。上記アルキレン基およびアリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよい。 Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L e30 include an alkylene group (preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms), -NH-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CO-, -O-, -COO-, OCO-, -CONR x3 -, -S-, and a group formed by combining two or more of these groups. R x3 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. The alkylene group and the arylene group may have a substituent.

 We30が表すグラフト鎖としては、上述したグラフト鎖が挙げられる。 The graft chain represented by W e30 includes the above-mentioned graft chain.

 グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位の重量平均分子量は、1000以上であることが好ましく、1000~10000であることがより好ましく、1000~7500であることが更に好ましい。なお、本明細書において、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位の重量平均分子量は、同繰り返し単位の重合に用いた原料モノマーの重量平均分子量から算出した値である。例えば、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位は、マクロモノマーを重合することで形成できる。ここで、マクロモノマーとは、ポリマー末端に重合性基が導入された高分子化合物を意味する。マクロモノマーを用いてグラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を形成した場合においては、マクロモノマーの重量平均分子量がグラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位に該当する。 The weight average molecular weight of the repeating unit having a graft chain is preferably 1000 or more, more preferably 1000 to 10000, and even more preferably 1000 to 7500. In this specification, the weight average molecular weight of the repeating unit having a graft chain is a value calculated from the weight average molecular weight of the raw material monomer used in the polymerization of the repeating unit. For example, a repeating unit having a graft chain can be formed by polymerizing a macromonomer. Here, a macromonomer means a polymeric compound in which a polymerizable group is introduced at the polymer end. When a repeating unit having a graft chain is formed using a macromonomer, the weight average molecular weight of the macromonomer corresponds to the repeating unit having a graft chain.

 酸性グラフト樹脂が有する酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基が挙げられ、カルボキシ基が好ましい。 The acid groups contained in the acidic graft resin include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, and a phosphate group, with the carboxy group being preferred.

 酸性グラフト樹脂は、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位と、酸基を有する繰り返し単位とを含む樹脂であることが好ましい。また、酸性グラフト樹脂は、酸性グラフト樹脂の全繰り返し単位中、グラフト鎖を有する繰り返し単位を1モル%以上含むことが好ましく、2モル%以上含有することがより好ましく、3モル%以上含有することが更に好ましい。上限は、90モル%とすることもでき、80モル%以下とすることもでき、70モル%以下とすることもでき、60モル%以下とすることもでき、50モル%以下とすることもできる。また、酸性グラフト樹脂は、酸性グラフト樹脂の全繰り返し単位中、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を1モル%以上含むことが好ましく、2モル%以上含有することがより好ましく、3モル%以上含有することが更に好ましい。上限は、90モル%とすることもでき、80モル%以下とすることもでき、70モル%以下とすることもでき、60モル%以下とすることもでき、50モル%以下とすることもできる。 The acidic graft resin is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a graft chain and a repeating unit having an acid group. In addition, the acidic graft resin preferably contains 1 mol% or more of repeating units having a graft chain, more preferably 2 mol% or more, and even more preferably 3 mol% or more of repeating units having a graft chain, among all repeating units of the acidic graft resin. The upper limit can be 90 mol%, 80 mol% or less, 70 mol% or less, 60 mol% or less, or 50 mol% or less. In addition, the acidic graft resin preferably contains 1 mol% or more of repeating units having an acid group, more preferably 2 mol% or more, and even more preferably 3 mol% or more of repeating units having an acid group, among all repeating units of the acidic graft resin. The upper limit can be 90 mol%, 80 mol% or less, 70 mol% or less, 60 mol% or less, or 50 mol% or less.

 酸性グラフト樹脂は、さらに上記以外の他の繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。他の繰り返し単位としては、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位などが挙げられる。重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基、環状エーテル基などが挙げられる。 The acidic graft resin may further contain other repeating units in addition to those mentioned above. Examples of the other repeating units include repeating units having a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and a cyclic ether group.

 酸性グラフト樹脂の酸価は、20~150mgKOH/gが好ましい。上限は、130mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、110mgKOH/g以下がより好ましい。下限は、30mgKOH/g以上が好ましく、40mgKOH/g以上がより好ましい。 The acid value of the acidic graft resin is preferably 20 to 150 mgKOH/g. The upper limit is preferably 130 mgKOH/g or less, and more preferably 110 mgKOH/g or less. The lower limit is preferably 30 mgKOH/g or more, and more preferably 40 mgKOH/g or more.

 酸性グラフト樹脂の重量平均分子量は、5000~100000が好ましく、10000~50000がより好ましく、10000~30000が更に好ましい。酸性グラフト樹脂の数平均分子量(Mn)は、2500~50000が好ましく、5000~30000がより好ましく、5000~15000が更に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the acidic graft resin is preferably 5,000 to 100,000, more preferably 10,000 to 50,000, and even more preferably 10,000 to 30,000. The number average molecular weight (Mn) of the acidic graft resin is preferably 2,500 to 50,000, more preferably 5,000 to 30,000, and even more preferably 5,000 to 15,000.

 酸性グラフト樹脂の具体例としては、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0025~0094に記載された樹脂や後述する実施例に記載された構造の樹脂が挙げられる。 Specific examples of acidic graft resins include the resins described in paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP 2012-255128 A and the resins having the structures described in the examples described below.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、分散剤としての樹脂を含有することが好ましい。分散剤としては、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)が挙げられる。ここで、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)とは、酸基の量が塩基性基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、酸基の量が70モル%以上である樹脂が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)が有する酸基は、カルボキシ基が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)の酸価は、10~105mgKOH/gが好ましい。また、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)とは、塩基性基の量が酸基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、塩基性基の量が50モル%を超える樹脂が好ましい。塩基性分散剤が有する塩基性基は、アミノ基が好ましい。 The curable composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin as a dispersant. Examples of dispersants include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins). Here, the term "acidic dispersant (acidic resin)" refers to a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups. The acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of acid groups is 70 mol% or more when the total amount of the acid groups and the basic groups is 100 mol%. The acid group possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxy group. The acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10 to 105 mgKOH/g. The basic dispersant (basic resin) refers to a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups. The basic dispersant (basic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups when the total amount of the acid groups and the basic groups is 100 mol%. The basic group possessed by the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、グラフト樹脂であることも好ましい。グラフト樹脂の詳細は、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0025~0094の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The resin used as the dispersant is preferably a graft resin. For details of the graft resin, refer to paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP 2012-255128 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂であることも好ましい。芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂としては上述したものが挙げられる。 It is also preferable that the resin used as the dispersant is a resin having an aromatic carboxy group. Examples of resins having an aromatic carboxy group include those mentioned above.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に窒素原子を含むポリイミン系分散剤であることも好ましい。ポリイミン系分散剤としては、pKa14以下の官能基を有する部分構造を有する主鎖と、原子数40~10000の側鎖とを有し、かつ主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に塩基性窒素原子を有する樹脂が好ましい。塩基性窒素原子は、塩基性を呈する窒素原子であれば特に制限はない。ポリイミン系分散剤については、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0102~0166の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The resin used as the dispersant is preferably a polyimine-based dispersant containing nitrogen atoms in at least one of the main chain and side chain. The polyimine-based dispersant is preferably a resin having a main chain with a partial structure having a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less, a side chain with 40 to 10,000 atoms, and having a basic nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and side chain. There are no particular restrictions on the basic nitrogen atom, so long as it is a nitrogen atom that exhibits basicity. For details of polyimine-based dispersants, please refer to the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0166 of JP 2012-255128 A, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、コア部に複数個のポリマー鎖が結合した構造の樹脂であることも好ましい。このような樹脂としては、例えば、デンドリマー(星型ポリマーを含む)が挙げられる。また、デンドリマーの具体例としては、特開2013-043962号公報の段落番号0196~0209に記載された高分子化合物C-1~C-31などが挙げられる。 The resin used as the dispersant is preferably one having a structure in which multiple polymer chains are bonded to a core portion. Examples of such resins include dendrimers (including star-shaped polymers). Specific examples of dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP2013-043962A.

 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂の全繰り返し単位中10モル%以上であることが好ましく、10~80モル%であることがより好ましく、20~70モル%であることが更に好ましい。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain. The content of the repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol % or more of the total repeating units of the resin, more preferably 10 to 80 mol %, and even more preferably 20 to 70 mol %.

 分散剤として、特開2018-087939号公報に記載された樹脂、特許第6432077号公報の段落番号0219~0221に記載されたブロック共重合体(EB-1)~(EB-9)、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載のポリエステル側鎖を有するポリエチレンイミン、国際公開第2019/125940号に記載のブロック共重合体、特開2020-066687号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、特開2020-066688号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載の分散剤などを用いることもできる。 As dispersants, resins described in JP 2018-087939 A, block copolymers (EB-1) to (EB-9) described in paragraphs 0219 to 0221 of Japanese Patent No. 6,432,077 A, polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in WO 2016/104803 A, block copolymers described in WO 2019/125940 A, block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP 2020-066687 A, block polymers having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP 2020-066688 A, dispersants described in WO 2016/104803 A, and the like can also be used.

 分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、BYK-Chemie社製のDISPERBYKシリーズ、日本ルーブリゾール社製のSOLSPERSEシリーズ、BASF社製のEfkaシリーズ、味の素ファインテクノ(株)製のアジスパーシリーズ等が挙げられる。また、特開2012-137564号公報の段落番号0129に記載された製品、特開2017-194662号公報の段落番号0235に記載された製品を分散剤として用いることもできる。 Dispersants are also available as commercially available products, and specific examples include the DISPERBYK series manufactured by BYK-Chemie, the SOLSPERSE series manufactured by Lubrizol Nippon, the Efka series manufactured by BASF, and the AJISPER series manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine-Techno Co., Ltd. In addition, the products described in paragraph 0129 of JP2012-137564A and the products described in paragraph 0235 of JP2017-194662A can also be used as dispersants.

 硬化性組成物の全固形分中における樹脂の含有量は、1~40質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、30質量%以下であることが好ましく、25質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は3質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましく、10質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。
 硬化性組成物の全固形分中における酸性グラフト樹脂の含有量は、1~30質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、25質量%以下であることが好ましく、20質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は3質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましく、10質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、樹脂を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。樹脂を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The resin content in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 1 to 40% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 25% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more.
The content of the acidic graft resin in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 1 to 30% by mass. The upper limit is preferably 25% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more.
The curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of resin, or may contain two or more types of resins. When two or more types of resins are contained, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.

<<重合性化合物>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、重合性化合物を含有する。重合性化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物などが挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基および(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。本発明で用いられる重合性化合物は、ラジカル重合性化合物であることが好ましい。
<<Polymerizable compound>>
The curable composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound. The polymerizable compound may be a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. The ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group may be a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, or a (meth)acryloyl group. The polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radical polymerizable compound.

 重合性化合物としては、モノマー、プレポリマー、オリゴマーなどの化学的形態のいずれであってもよいが、モノマーであることが好ましい。重合性化合物の分子量は、100~2500が好ましい。上限は、2000以下が好ましく、1500以下がより好ましい。下限は、150以上が好ましく、250以上がより好ましい。 The polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form, such as a monomer, prepolymer, or oligomer, but is preferably a monomer. The molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 2500. The upper limit is preferably 2000 or less, more preferably 1500 or less. The lower limit is preferably 150 or more, more preferably 250 or more.

 重合性化合物のエチレン性不飽和結合含有基価(以下、C=C価という)は、硬化性組成物の保存安定性の観点から2~14mmol/gであることが好ましい。下限は、3mmol/g以上であることが好ましく、4mmol/g以上であることがより好ましく、5mmol/g以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は12mmol/g以下であることが好ましく、10mmol/g以下であることがより好ましく、8mmol/g以下であることが更に好ましい。重合性化合物のC=C価は、重合性化合物の1分子中に含まれるエチレン性不飽和結合含有基の数を重合性化合物の分子量で割ることで算出した値である。 The ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group value (hereinafter referred to as the C=C value) of the polymerizable compound is preferably 2 to 14 mmol/g from the viewpoint of the storage stability of the curable composition. The lower limit is preferably 3 mmol/g or more, more preferably 4 mmol/g or more, and even more preferably 5 mmol/g or more. The upper limit is preferably 12 mmol/g or less, more preferably 10 mmol/g or less, and even more preferably 8 mmol/g or less. The C=C value of the polymerizable compound is a value calculated by dividing the number of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups contained in one molecule of the polymerizable compound by the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound.

 重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を3個以上含む化合物であることが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を3~15個含む化合物であることがより好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を3~6個含む化合物であることが更に好ましい。また、重合性化合物は、3~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが好ましく、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがより好ましい。重合性化合物の具体例としては、国際公開第2022/065215号の段落番号0075~0083に記載の化合物、台湾特許出願公開第201832008号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 The polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, more preferably a compound containing 3 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, and even more preferably a compound containing 3 to 6 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups. The polymerizable compound is preferably a 3-15 functional (meth)acrylate compound, and more preferably a 3-6 functional (meth)acrylate compound. Specific examples of the polymerizable compound include the compounds described in paragraphs 0075 to 0083 of WO 2022/065215 and the compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 201832008.

 重合性化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬(株)製、NKエステルA-DPH-12E;新中村化学工業(株)製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコールおよび/またはプロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造の化合物(例えば、サートマー社から市販されている、SR454、SR499)が好ましい。また、重合性化合物としては、ジグリセリンEO(エチレンオキシド)変性(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはM-460;東亞合成製)、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製、NKエステルA-TMMT)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(日本化薬(株)製、KAYARAD HDDA)、RP-1040(日本化薬(株)製)、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、NKオリゴUA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600、LINC-202UA(共栄社化学(株)製)、8UH-1006、8UH-1012(以上、大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、ライトアクリレートPOB-A0(共栄社化学(株)製)、特開2023-043479号公報に記載のデンドリマー構造またはハイパーブランチ構造を有する重合性化合物などを用いることもできる。 Preferred polymerizable compounds include dipentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-320; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (commercially available product is KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate (commercially available products are KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., and NK Ester A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and compounds in which the (meth)acryloyl groups are bonded via ethylene glycol and/or propylene glycol residues (e.g., SR454, SR499, commercially available from Sartomer Corporation). Examples of polymerizable compounds include diglycerol EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth)acrylate (commercially available product is M-460; manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (NK Ester A-TMMT, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (KAYARAD HDDA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and NK Oligo UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.). Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600, LINC-202UA (Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), 8UH-1006, 8UH-1012 (all manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), Light Acrylate POB-A0 (Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), and polymerizable compounds having a dendrimer structure or hyperbranch structure as described in JP-A-2023-043479 can also be used.

 重合性化合物としては、エチレンオキシド繰り返し鎖を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。この態様によれば、本発明の効果がより顕著に発揮される。エチレンオキシド繰り返し鎖を有する重合性化合物としては、式(EO-1)で表される化合物などが挙げられる。
As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having an ethylene oxide repeating chain can also be used. According to this embodiment, the effects of the present invention are more remarkable. As the polymerizable compound having an ethylene oxide repeating chain, a compound represented by formula (EO-1) can be mentioned.

 式(EO-1)のRE1は、水素原子またはメチル基を表す。 R E1 in formula (EO-1) represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.

 式(EO-1)のLE1は、m価の連結基を表す。LE1が表すm価の連結基は、炭化水素基、複素環基、-O-、-S-、-NRA1-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-SO-およびこれらの基を2以上の組み合わせた基などが挙げられる。RA1は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。炭化水素基は、脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、芳香族炭化水素基であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、環状であってもよく、非環状であってもよい。非環状の脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖の脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、分岐の脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、不飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基を有していなくてもよい。また、環状の脂肪族炭化水素基、および、芳香族炭化水素基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基としては、5員環または6員環が好ましい。複素環基は、脂肪族複素環基であっても、芳香族複素環基であってもよい。また、複素環基を構成するヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子などが挙げられる。 L E1 in formula (EO-1) represents an m-valent linking group. Examples of the m-valent linking group represented by L E1 include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, -O-, -S-, -NR A1 -, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -SO 2 -, and a group obtained by combining two or more of these groups. R A1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom. The hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be cyclic or non-cyclic. The non-cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a straight-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon group or a branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent or may not have a substituent. The cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. The heterocyclic group may be a single ring or a condensed ring. The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered ring. The heterocyclic group may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. The heteroatom constituting the heterocyclic group may be a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, etc.

 式(EO-1)のnは1~20の整数を表し、mは2~10の整数を表す。nは1~15の整数であることが好ましく、1~10の整数であることがより好ましい。mは2~8の整数であることが好ましく、2~6の整数であることがより好ましい。 In formula (EO-1), n represents an integer from 1 to 20, and m represents an integer from 2 to 10. n is preferably an integer from 1 to 15, and more preferably an integer from 1 to 10. m is preferably an integer from 2 to 8, and more preferably an integer from 2 to 6.

 重合性化合物としては、フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物は、2官能の重合性化合物であることが好ましい。フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物としては、下記式(Fr)で表される部分構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。
As the polymerizable compound, a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used. The polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton is preferably a bifunctional polymerizable compound. As the polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton, a compound having a partial structure represented by the following formula (Fr) can be mentioned.

 式中、*は、結合手を表し、Rf1およびRf2はそれぞれ独立して置換基を表し、mおよびnはそれぞれ独立して0~5の整数を表す。mが2以上の場合、m個のRf1は同一であってもよく、それぞれ異なっていてもよく、m個のRf1のうち2個のRf1同士が結合して環を形成していてもよい。nが2以上の場合、n個のRf2は同一であってもよく、それぞれ異なっていてもよく、n個のRf2のうち2個のRf2同士が結合して環を形成していてもよい。Rf1およびRf2が表す置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、-ORf11、-CORf12、-COORf13、-OCORf14、-NRf15f16、-NHCORf17、-CONRf18f19、-NHCONRf20f21、-NHCOORf22、-SRf23、-SOf24、-SOORf25、-NHSOf26または-SONRf27f28が挙げられる。Rf11~Rf28は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロアリール基を表す。 In the formula, * represents a bond, R f1 and R f2 each independently represent a substituent, and m and n each independently represent an integer of 0 to 5. When m is 2 or more, m R f1s may be the same or different from each other, and two R f1s among the m R f1s may be bonded to each other to form a ring. When n is 2 or more, n R f2s may be the same or different from each other, and two R f2s among the n R f2s may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Examples of the substituents represented by R f1 and R f2 include a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, -OR f11 , -COR f12 , -COOR f13 , -OCOR f14 , -NR f15 R f16 , -NHCOR f17 , -CONR f18 R f19 , -NHCONR f20 R f21 , -NHCOOR f22 , -SR f23 , -SO 2 R f24 , -SO 2 OR f25 , -NHSO 2 R f26 , and -SO 2 NR f27 R f28 . R f11 to R f28 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group.

 フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物の具体例としては下記構造の化合物が挙げられる。また、フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物の市販品としては、オグソールEA-0200、EA-0300(大阪ガスケミカル(株)製、フルオレン骨格を有する(メタ)アクリレートモノマー)などが挙げられる。
Specific examples of the polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton include compounds having the following structure: Furthermore, commercially available products of the polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton include OGSOL EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd., (meth)acrylate monomers having a fluorene skeleton).

 硬化性組成物の全固形分中における重合性化合物の含有量は、1~25質量%であることが好ましい。上限は、20質量%以下であることが好ましく、15質量%以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、3質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 The content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 1 to 25 mass%. The upper limit is preferably 20 mass% or less, and more preferably 15 mass% or less. The lower limit is preferably 3 mass% or more, and more preferably 5 mass% or more.

 硬化性組成物は、樹脂100質量部に対して重合性化合物を5~100質量部含有することが好ましい。重合性化合物の上記含有量の上限は、80質量部以下であることが好ましく、70質量部以下であることがより好ましい。重合性化合物の上記含有量の下限は、10質量部以上であることが好ましく、20質量部以上であることがより好ましい。 The curable composition preferably contains 5 to 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound per 100 parts by mass of the resin. The upper limit of the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 80 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 70 parts by mass or less. The lower limit of the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 20 parts by mass or more.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、重合性化合物を、1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。重合性化合物を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerizable compound, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types of polymerizable compounds are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.

<<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、光重合開始剤を含む。光重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有する化合物が好ましい。光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。
<<Photopolymerization initiator>>
The curable composition of the present invention contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, a compound having photosensitivity to light rays in the ultraviolet range to the visible range is preferred. The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.

 光重合開始剤としては、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物などが挙げられる。光重合開始剤は、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、ホスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物および3-アリール置換クマリン化合物であることが好ましく、オキシム化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、および、アシルホスフィン化合物から選ばれる化合物であることがより好ましく、オキシム化合物であることが更に好ましい。また、光重合開始剤としては、特開2014-130173号公報の段落0065~0111に記載された化合物、特許第6301489号公報に記載された化合物、MATERIAL STAGE 37~60p,vol.19,No.3,2019に記載されたパーオキサイド系光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/221177号に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/110179号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-043864号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-044030号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-167313号公報に記載の過酸化物系開始剤、特開2020-055992号公報に記載のオキサゾリジン基を有するアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特開2013-190459号公報に記載のオキシム系光重合開始剤、特開2020-172619号公報に記載の重合体、国際公開第2020/152120号に記載の式1で表される化合物、特開2021-181406号公報に記載の化合物、特開2022-013379号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2022-015747号公報に記載の式(1)で表される化合物、特表2021-507058号公報に記載のフッ素含有フルオレンオキシムエステル系光開始剤、中国特許出願公開第110764367号明細書に記載の開始剤、特表2022-518535号公報に記載の開始剤、国際公開第2021/175855号に記載の開始剤、台湾特許出願公開第202200534号公報に記載の化合物、特開2022-078550号公報に記載の化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2017-0087330号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2022/075452号に記載の化合物、中国特許出願公開第110066225号明細書に記載のオキシムエステル化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2022-0076157号公報に記載の化合物、トリアリールアミンまたはN-アリールカルバゾール骨格を有する国際公開第2019/013112号の段落番号0042~0062に記載の化合物、特許第7219378号公報に記載のオキシムエステル系光重合開始剤、韓国公開特許第10-2021-0146174号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2019/013112号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2023-033731号公報に記載の光重合開始剤などが挙げられる。 Photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, etc. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a trihalomethyltriazine compound, a benzyl dimethyl ketal compound, an α-hydroxyketone compound, an α-aminoketone compound, an acylphosphine compound, a phosphine oxide compound, a metallocene compound, an oxime compound, a hexaarylbiimidazole compound, an onium compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzophenone compound, an acetophenone compound, a cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complex, a halomethyloxadiazole compound, or a 3-aryl substituted coumarin compound, more preferably a compound selected from an oxime compound, an α-hydroxyketone compound, an α-aminoketone compound, and an acylphosphine compound, and even more preferably an oxime compound. In addition, examples of the photopolymerization initiator include the compounds described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP 2014-130173 A, the compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6301489 A, and the compounds described in MATERIAL STAGE 37 to 60p, vol. 19, No. 3, 2019, a photopolymerization initiator described in WO 2018/221177, a photopolymerization initiator described in WO 2018/110179, a photopolymerization initiator described in JP 2019-043864 A, a photopolymerization initiator described in JP 2019-044030 A, a peroxide-based initiator described in JP 2019-167313 A, an aminoacetophenone-based initiator having an oxazolidine group described in JP 2020-055992 A, Oxime-based photopolymerization initiators described in JP-A-0459, polymers described in JP-A-2020-172619, compounds represented by formula 1 described in WO 2020/152120, compounds described in JP-A-2021-181406, photopolymerization initiators described in JP-A-2022-013379, compounds represented by formula (1) described in JP-A-2022-015747, fluorine-containing fluorene oxime ester-based photoinitiators described in JP-T-2021-507058, Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 1107643 Initiators described in JP-A-2022-518535, initiators described in WO 2021/175855, compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 202200534, compounds described in JP-A-2022-078550, compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0087330, compounds described in WO 2022/075452, oxime ester compounds described in Chinese Patent Application Publication No. 110066225, Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0087330, Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include the compound described in WO 2019/013112, the compound having a triarylamine or N-arylcarbazole skeleton described in paragraphs 0042 to 0062 of WO 2019/013112, the oxime ester-based photopolymerization initiator described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 7219378, the photopolymerization initiator described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2021-0146174, the photopolymerization initiator described in WO 2019/013112, and the photopolymerization initiator described in JP 2023-033731.

 ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物の具体例としては、2,2’,4-トリス(2-クロロフェニル)-5-(3,4-ジメトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニル-1,1’-ビイミダゾールなどが挙げられる。 Specific examples of hexaarylbiimidazole compounds include 2,2',4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1'-biimidazole.

 α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 184、Omnirad 1173、Omnirad 2959、Omnirad 127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 184、Irgacure 1173、Irgacure 2959、Irgacure 127(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。α-アミノケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 907、Omnirad 369、Omnirad 369E、Omnirad 379EG(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 907、Irgacure 369、Irgacure 369E、Irgacure 379EG(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。アシルホスフィン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 819、Omnirad TPO(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 819、Irgacure TPO(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Commercially available α-hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure 127 (all manufactured by BASF), etc. Commercially available α-aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 907, Irgacure 369, Irgacure 369E, Irgacure 379EG (all manufactured by BASF), etc. Commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (all manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 819, Irgacure TPO (all manufactured by BASF), etc.

 オキシム化合物としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0142に記載の化合物、特許第5430746号に記載の化合物、特許第5647738号に記載の化合物、特開2021-173858号公報の一般式(1)で表される化合物や段落0022から0024に記載の化合物、特開2021-170089号公報の一般式(1)で表される化合物や段落0117から0120に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、3-ベンゾイルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)フェニル]-3-シクロヘキシル-プロパン-1,2-ジオン-2-(O-アセチルオキシム)などが挙げられる。市販品としては、Irgacure OXE01、Irgacure OXE02、Irgacure OXE03、Irgacure OXE04(以上、BASF社製)、TR-PBG-301、TR-PBG-304、TR-PBG-327(TRONLY社製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光重合開始剤2)が挙げられる。また、オキシム化合物としては、着色性が無い化合物や、透明性が高く変色し難い化合物を用いることも好ましい。市販品としては、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831、NCI-930(以上、(株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of oxime compounds include the compound described in paragraph 0142 of WO 2022/085485, the compound described in Japanese Patent No. 5,430,746, the compound described in Japanese Patent No. 5,647,738, the compound represented by general formula (1) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0022 to 0024 of JP 2021-173858 A, the compound represented by general formula (1) and the compounds described in paragraphs 0117 to 0120 of JP 2021-170089 A, and the like. Specific examples of the oxime compound include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-3-cyclohexyl-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-acetyloxime), and the like. Commercially available products include Irgacure OXE01, Irgacure OXE02, Irgacure OXE03, and Irgacure OXE04 (all manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-301, TR-PBG-304, and TR-PBG-327 (manufactured by TRONLY), and Adeka Optomer N-1919 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation, photopolymerization initiator 2 described in JP 2012-014052 A). In addition, it is also preferable to use a compound that is not colorable or a compound that is highly transparent and does not easily discolor as the oxime compound. Commercially available products include Adeka Arcles NCI-730, NCI-831, and NCI-930 (all manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).

 光重合開始剤としては、フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール環の少なくとも1つのベンゼン環がナフタレン環となった骨格を有するオキシム化合物、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物、ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物、カルバゾール骨格にヒドロキシ基を有する置換基が結合したオキシム化合物、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0143~0149に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a fluorene ring, an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of a carbazole ring is replaced with a naphthalene ring, an oxime compound having a fluorine atom, an oxime compound having a nitro group, an oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton, an oxime compound in which a substituent having a hydroxyl group is bonded to a carbazole skeleton, or a compound described in paragraphs 0143 to 0149 of WO 2022/085485 can be used.

 光重合開始剤としては、式(OX-1)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。 As a photopolymerization initiator, a compound represented by formula (OX-1) can also be used.

 式(OX-1)中、X1aは芳香族環および複素環からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む2価の連結基を表し、
 R1aは水素原子またはアシル基を表し、
 R2aはアルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 R3aおよびR4aはそれぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、
 AlkおよびAlkはそれぞれ独立してアルキル基を表し、
 R3aとR4aは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 AlkとAlkは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 nは0または1を表す。
In formula (OX-1), X 1a represents a divalent linking group containing at least one ring selected from the group consisting of an aromatic ring and a heterocycle;
R 1a represents a hydrogen atom or an acyl group;
R2a represents an alkyl group or an aryl group;
R 3a and R 4a each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group;
Alk 1 and Alk 2 each independently represent an alkyl group;
R 3a and R 4a may be bonded to form a ring;
Alk 1 and Alk 2 may be linked to form a ring;
n represents 0 or 1.

 式(OX-1)のX1aが表す2価の連結基としては、2価の芳香族環基、2価の複素環基、2以上の芳香族環を単結合または連結基を介して結合した2価の基、2以上の複素環を単結合または連結基を介して結合した2価の基、芳香族環と複素環を単結合または連結基を介して結合した2価の基が挙げられる。上記芳香族環同士、複素環基同士、または、芳香族環と複素環とを結合する連結基としては、-CH-、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-NR-及びこれらを組み合わせた基などが挙げられる。Rは、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基または複素環基を表す。 Examples of the divalent linking group represented by X 1a in formula (OX-1) include a divalent aromatic ring group, a divalent heterocyclic group, a divalent group in which two or more aromatic rings are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, a divalent group in which two or more heterocycles are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, and a divalent group in which an aromatic ring and a heterocycle are bonded via a single bond or a linking group. Examples of the linking group that bonds the above-mentioned aromatic rings, heterocyclic groups, or aromatic rings and heterocycles include -CH 2 -, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -NR x -, and groups combining these. R x represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.

 式(OX-1)のX1aは、式(X-1)~(X-13)のいずれで表される基であることが好ましく、式(X-1)、式(X-2)、式(X-4)、式(X-6)または式(X-8)で表される基であることがより好ましく、式(X-2)または式(X-6)で表される基であることが更に好ましい。
 式中RX1~RX9は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基または複素環基を表す。
X 1a in formula (OX-1) is preferably a group represented by any one of formulas (X-1) to (X-13), more preferably a group represented by formula (X-1), formula (X-2), formula (X-4), formula (X-6) or formula (X-8), and further preferably a group represented by formula (X-2) or formula (X-6).
In the formula, R X1 to R X9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group.

 RX1~RX9が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、複素環基などが挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.

 RX1~RX9が表すアルケニル基の炭素数は、2~15であることが好ましく、2~10であることがより好ましい。アルケニル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルケニル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、複素環基などが挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 2 to 15, and more preferably 2 to 10. The alkenyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkenyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.

 RX1~RX9が表すアルキニル基の炭素数は、2~15であることが好ましく、2~10であることがより好ましい。アルキニル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキニル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、複素環基などが挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkynyl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 2 to 15, and more preferably 2 to 10. The alkynyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkynyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.

 RX1~RX9が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、複素環基などが挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6. The aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heterocyclic group.

 RX1~RX9が表す複素環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。複素環基が有するヘテロ原子は、酸素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子が好ましい。複素環基が有するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3個が好ましい。複素環基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基などが挙げられる。 The heterocyclic group represented by R X1 to R X9 is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered ring. The heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic group are preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3. The heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and an aryl group.

 式(OX-1)のR1aは水素原子またはアシル基を表し、アシル基であることが好ましい。
 R1aが表すアシル基は、-C(O)-R101で表される基であることが好ましい。R101は、アリール基または複素環基を表し、アリール基であることが好ましい。
In formula (OX-1), R 1a represents a hydrogen atom or an acyl group, and is preferably an acyl group.
The acyl group represented by R 1a is preferably a group represented by —C(O)—R 101. R 101 represents an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and is preferably an aryl group.

 R101が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、複素環基などが挙げられる。R101が表すアリール基は、フェニル基、メチルフェニル基またはナフチル基であることが好ましく、メチルフェニル基またはナフチル基であることがより好ましい。 The number of carbon atoms of the aryl group represented by R 101 is preferably 6 to 20, and more preferably 6 to 12. The aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heterocyclic group. The aryl group represented by R 101 is preferably a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a methylphenyl group or a naphthyl group.

 R101が表す複素環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。複素環基が有するヘテロ原子は、酸素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子が好ましい。複素環基が有するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3個が好ましい。複素環基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基などが挙げられる。 The heterocyclic group represented by R 101 is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered ring. The heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic group are preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3. The heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and an aryl group.

 式(OX-1)のR2aは、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、発生ラジカルの反応性が高いという理由からアルキル基であることが好ましい。
 R2aが表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましく、1~5であることが更に好ましく、1~3であることがより一層好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよいが、無置換のアルキル基であることが好ましい。R2aが表すアルキル基は、無置換の直鎖または分岐のアルキル基であることが好ましく、無置換の直鎖のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 R2aが表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよいが、無置換のアリール基であることが好ましい。
R 2a in formula (OX-1) represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and is preferably an alkyl group because the reactivity of the generated radical is high.
The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R 2a is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group. The alkyl group represented by R 2a is preferably an unsubstituted linear or branched alkyl group, and more preferably an unsubstituted linear alkyl group.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R 2a is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6. The aryl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted aryl group.

 式(OX-1)のR3aおよびR4aはそれぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 R3aおよびR4aが表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましく、1~5であることが更に好ましく、1~3であることがより一層好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよいが、無置換のアルキル基であることが好ましい。
 R3aとR4aは結合して環を形成していてもよい。形成される環は、5員環または6員環の環であることが好ましく、5員環または6員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることがより好ましい。
In formula (OX-1), R 3a and R 4a each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and preferably a hydrogen atom.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R 3a and R 4a is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group.
R3a and R4a may be bonded to form a ring. The ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring.

 式(OX-1)のAlkおよびAlkはそれぞれ独立してアルキル基を表す。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましく、1~5であることが更に好ましく、1~3であることがより一層好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよいが、無置換のアルキル基であることが好ましい。
 AlkとAlkは結合して環を形成していてもよく、環を形成していることが好ましい。形成される環は、5員環または6員環の環であることが好ましく、5員環または6員環の脂肪族炭化水素環であることがより好ましく、シクロペンタン環またはシクロヘキサン環であることがより好ましい。
In formula (OX-1), Alk 1 and Alk 2 each independently represent an alkyl group. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but is preferably linear or branched, and more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group.
Alk1 and Alk2 may be bonded to form a ring, and preferably form a ring. The ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring, more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, and more preferably a cyclopentane ring or a cyclohexane ring.

 式(OX-1)のnは0または1を表し、0であることが好ましい。 In formula (OX-1), n represents 0 or 1, and is preferably 0.

 式(OX-1)で表される化合物の具体例としては、特開2012-113104号公報の段落番号0092~0096に記載の化合物、特開2012-189997号公報の段落番号0041に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (OX-1) include the compounds described in paragraphs 0092 to 0096 of JP2012-113104A and the compounds described in paragraph 0041 of JP2012-189997A.

 光重合開始剤としては、式(OX-2)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。 As a photopolymerization initiator, a compound represented by formula (OX-2) can also be used.

 式(OX-2)中、R1bおよびR2bはそれぞれ独立して置換基を表し、R3b~R7bは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、Ar1bは置換基を有していてもよい芳香族環基または複素環基を表し、nは0または1を表す。 In formula (OX-2), R 1b and R 2b each independently represent a substituent, R 3b to R 7b each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, Ar 1b represents an aromatic ring group or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and n represents 0 or 1.

 R1bおよびR2bが表す置換基としては、アルキル基およびアリール基が挙げられ、アルキル基であることが好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、複素環基などが挙げられる。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、複素環基などが挙げられる。 Examples of the substituent represented by R 1b and R 2b include an alkyl group and an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heterocyclic group. The number of carbon atoms of the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, even more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6. The aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heterocyclic group.

 R3b~R7bが表す置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基およびアリール基が挙げられる。アルキル基およびアリール基としては上述したものが挙げられる。
 R3b~R7bは水素原子であることが好ましい。
The substituents represented by R 3b to R 7b include a halogen atom, an alkyl group and an aryl group, the alkyl group and the aryl group being as described above.
R 3b to R 7b are preferably hydrogen atoms.

 Ar1bは置換基を有していてもよい芳香族環基または複素環基を表し、Ar1bは置換基を有していてもよい芳香族環基であることが好ましい。芳香族環基はベンゼン環基またはナフタレン環基であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環基であることがより好ましい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ニトロ基およびアシル基が挙げられ、アシル基であることが好ましい。アシル基としては、上述したアシル基が挙げられる。 Ar 1b represents an aromatic ring group or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and Ar 1b is preferably an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent. The aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a nitro group, and an acyl group, and an acyl group is preferable. Examples of the acyl group include the acyl groups described above.

 光重合開始剤としては、式(OX-3)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。 As a photopolymerization initiator, a compound represented by formula (OX-3) can also be used.

 式(OX-3)中、Ar1cは(k+m+1)価の芳香族環基又は(k+m+1)価の複素環基を表し、
 Ar2cは(k+2)価の芳香族環基又は(k+2)価の複素環基を表し、
 R1c~R3cはそれぞれ独立して置換基を表し、
 L1cは単結合またはCR11c12cを表し、R11c及びR12cはそれぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、
 X1cは-O-または-S-を表し、
 kは0又は1を表し、mは0~4の整数を表し、nは0又は1を表す。
In formula (OX-3), Ar 1c represents a (k+m+1)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+m+1)-valent heterocyclic group;
Ar 2c represents a (k+2)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+2)-valent heterocyclic group;
R 1c to R 3c each independently represent a substituent;
L 1c represents a single bond or CR 11c R 12c , and R 11c and R 12c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group;
X 1c represents -O- or -S-;
k represents 0 or 1; m represents an integer of 0 to 4; and n represents 0 or 1.

 R1cおよびR2cが表す置換基としては、アルキル基およびアリール基が挙げられ、アルキル基であることが好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、複素環基などが挙げられる。アリール基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、複素環基などが挙げられる。
 R2cは、分岐または環状構造を有するアルキル基であることが好ましい。
Examples of the substituent represented by R 1c and R 2c include an alkyl group and an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heterocyclic group. The number of carbon atoms of the aryl group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 12, even more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6. The aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, and a heterocyclic group.
R 2c is preferably an alkyl group having a branched or cyclic structure.

 R3cが表す置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基およびアシル基が挙げられ、アシル基であることが好ましい。アシル基としては、上述したアシル基が挙げられる。 Examples of the substituent represented by R3c include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, and an acyl group, and an acyl group is preferable. Examples of the acyl group include the acyl groups described above.

 Ar1cは(k+m+1)価の芳香族環基又は(k+m+1)価の複素環基を表し、(k+m+1)価の芳香族環基であることが好ましい。芳香族環基はベンゼン環基またはナフタレン環基であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環基であることがより好ましい。 Ar 1c represents a (k+m+1)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+m+1)-valent heterocyclic group, and is preferably a (k+m+1)-valent aromatic ring group. The aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.

 Ar2cは(k+2)価の芳香族環基又は(k+2)価の複素環基を表し、(k+2)価の芳香族環基であることが好ましい。芳香族環基はベンゼン環基またはナフタレン環基であることが好ましく、ベンゼン環基であることがより好ましい。 Ar2c represents a (k+2)-valent aromatic ring group or a (k+2)-valent heterocyclic group, and is preferably a (k+2)-valent aromatic ring group. The aromatic ring group is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.

 kは0又は1を表し、0であることが好ましい。 k represents 0 or 1, and is preferably 0.

 mは0~4の整数を表し、0または1であることが好ましく、1であることがより好ましい。 m represents an integer from 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 1.

 光重合開始剤としては、1分子中にオキシム基を2個以上有するオキシム化合物を用いることも好ましい。この態様によれば、湿度の高い環境下における、他の層との隣接面におけるシワの発生がより抑制された光学部材などの硬化物を形成することができる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, it is also preferable to use an oxime compound having two or more oxime groups in one molecule. According to this embodiment, it is possible to form a cured product such as an optical component in which the occurrence of wrinkles on the surface adjacent to other layers is further suppressed in a humid environment.

 1分子中にオキシム基を2個以上有するオキシム化合物としては、式(OX-10)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
 式(OX-10)中、X11は2価の連結基を表し、
 R11およびR12は、それぞれ独立してアルキル基、アリール基、または、ヘテロアリール基を表し、
 R13およびR14は、それぞれ独立してアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリール基、又は、ヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、
 mおよびnは、それぞれ独立して0または1を表す。
The oxime compound having two or more oxime groups in one molecule is preferably a compound represented by formula (OX-10).
In formula (OX-10), X represents a divalent linking group.
R 11 and R 12 each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group;
R 13 and R 14 each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryl group, or a heteroaryloxy group;
m and n each independently represent 0 or 1.

 式(OX-10)のX11が表す2価の連結基は、芳香族環および複素環から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む2価の連結基であることが好ましい。
 X11が表す2価の連結基としては、2価の芳香族環基、2価の複素環基、2以上の芳香族環を単結合または連結基を介して結合した2価の基、2以上の複素環を単結合または連結基を介して結合した2価の基、芳香族環と複素環を単結合または連結基を介して結合した2価の基などが挙げられる。上記連結基としては、-CH-、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-NR-およびこれらを組み合わせた基などが挙げられる。Rは、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基または複素環基を表す。
The divalent linking group represented by X 11 in formula (OX-10) is preferably a divalent linking group containing at least one ring selected from an aromatic ring and a heterocyclic ring.
Examples of the divalent linking group represented by X11 include a divalent aromatic ring group, a divalent heterocyclic group, a divalent group in which two or more aromatic rings are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, a divalent group in which two or more heterocycles are bonded via a single bond or a linking group, and a divalent group in which an aromatic ring and a heterocycle are bonded via a single bond or a linking group. Examples of the linking group include -CH2- , -O-, -CO-, -S-, -NRx- , and groups combining these. Rx represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.

 X11が表す2価の連結基の具体例としては、式(X-101)~(X-109)のいずれで表される基が挙げられ、本発明の効果が顕著に発揮されるという理由から、式(X-101)~(X-104)のいずれかで表される基であることが好ましく、式(X-101)で表される基であることがより好ましい。
Specific examples of the divalent linking group represented by X11 include groups represented by any of formulas (X-101) to (X-109). From the viewpoint of the remarkable effect of the present invention, a group represented by any of formulas (X-101) to (X-104) is preferable, and a group represented by formula (X-101) is more preferable.

 式中、*は結合手を表し、RY1~RY4は、それぞれ独立して、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基または複素環基を表し、
 RX1~RX3は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基または複素環基を表し、
 m1およびm2は、それぞれ独立して0~4を表し、
 m3およびm4は、それぞれ独立して0~3を表す。
In the formula, * represents a bond, and R Y1 to R Y4 each independently represent a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
R X1 to R X3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group;
m1 and m2 each independently represent 0 to 4;
m3 and m4 each independently represent 0 to 3.

 RY1~RY4が表すハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子およびヨウ素原子が挙げられる。
 RY1~RY4およびRX1~RX3が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基および複素環基などが挙げられる。
 RY1~RY4およびRX1~RX3が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~15が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子およびアルキル基などが挙げられる。
The halogen atom represented by R Y1 to R Y4 includes a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom.
The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R Y1 to R Y4 and R X1 to R X3 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkyl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R Y1 to R Y4 and R X1 to R X3 is preferably 6 to 15, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6. The aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.

 RY1~RY4およびRX1~RX3が表す複素環基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は、1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の種類としては、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子が挙げられる。複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。複素環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子およびアルキル基などが挙げられる。 The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group represented by R Y1 to R Y4 and R X1 to R X3 is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10. The types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group include nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, and sulfur atoms. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 to 2. The heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. The heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.

 式(OX-10)のR11およびR12は、それぞれ独立してアルキル基、アリール基、または、ヘテロアリール基を表す。 In formula (OX-10), R 11 and R 12 each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group.

 R11およびR12が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましく、1~5が更に好ましく、1~3がより一層好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよいが無置換であることが好ましい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、複素環基などが挙げられる。R11およびR12が表すアルキル基は、メチル基であることが特に好ましい。
 R11およびR12が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~15が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子およびアルキル基などが挙げられる。
 R11およびR12が表すヘテロアリール基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は、1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の種類としては、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子が挙げられる。ヘテロアリール基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。ヘテロアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子およびアルキル基などが挙げられる。
The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R 11 and R 12 is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10, even more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The alkyl group may have a substituent, but is preferably unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group. The alkyl group represented by R 11 and R 12 is particularly preferably a methyl group.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by R 11 and R 12 is preferably 6 to 15, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6. The aryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group represented by R 11 and R 12 is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10. The types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl group is preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 to 2. The heteroaryl group may be a single ring or a condensed ring. The heteroaryl group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.

 式(OX-10)のR11およびR12は、それぞれ独立してアルキル基またはアリール基であることが好ましく、アルキル基であることがより好ましい。 In formula (OX-10), R 11 and R 12 each independently represent preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, and more preferably an alkyl group.

 式(OX-10)のR13およびR14は、それぞれ独立してアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリール基、または、ヘテロアリールオキシ基を表し、アルキル基またはアリール基であることが好ましく、アルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 R13およびR14が表すアルキル基、アリール基およびヘテロアリール基としては、式(OX-10)のR11およびR12が表すこれらの基が挙げられ、好ましい範囲も同様である。
 R13およびR14が表すアルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~15であることが好ましく、1~10であることがより好ましい。アルコキシ基は、直鎖および分岐のいずれでもよい。アルコキシ基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、複素環基などが挙げられる。
 R13およびR14が表すアリールオキシ基の炭素数は、6~15が好ましく、6~12がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましく、6が特に好ましい。アリールオキシ基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子およびアルキル基などが挙げられる。
 R13およびR14が表すヘテロアリールオキシ基におけるヘテロアリール部位の環を構成する炭素原子の数は、1~15が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール部位の環を構成するヘテロ原子の種類としては、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子が挙げられる。ヘテロアリール部位の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3が好ましく、1~2がより好ましい。ヘテロアリール部位は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。ヘテロアリールオキシ基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子およびアルキル基などが挙げられる。
R 13 and R 14 in formula (OX-10) each independently represent an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryl group, or a heteroaryloxy group, preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably an alkyl group.
The alkyl group, aryl group and heteroaryl group represented by R 13 and R 14 include those groups represented by R 11 and R 12 in formula (OX-10), and the preferred ranges are also the same.
The number of carbon atoms of the alkoxy group represented by R 13 and R 14 is preferably 1 to 15, and more preferably 1 to 10. The alkoxy group may be either linear or branched. The alkoxy group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryloxy group represented by R 13 and R 14 is preferably 6 to 15, more preferably 6 to 12, still more preferably 6 to 10, and particularly preferably 6. The aryloxy group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.
The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl moiety in the heteroaryloxy group represented by R 13 and R 14 is preferably 1 to 15, more preferably 1 to 10. The types of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl moiety include nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms, and sulfur atoms. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heteroaryl moiety is preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1 to 2. The heteroaryl moiety may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. The heteroaryloxy group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom and an alkyl group.

 式(OX-10)のmおよびnはそれぞれ独立して0または1を表し、1であることが好ましい。 In formula (OX-10), m and n each independently represent 0 or 1, and are preferably 1.

 オキシム化合物の具体例としては、以下に示す化合物及び後述する実施例に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of oxime compounds include the compounds shown below and the compounds described in the Examples below.

 硬化性組成物の全固形分中における光重合開始剤の含有量は0.1~10質量%が好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上が好ましく、1質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、8質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 10 mass%. The lower limit is preferably 0.5 mass% or more, and more preferably 1 mass% or more. The upper limit is preferably 8 mass% or less, and more preferably 5 mass% or less.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、重合性化合物の100質量部に対して、光重合開始剤を10~45質量部含むことが好ましい。上限は40質量部以下であることが好ましい。下限は11質量部以上であることが好ましく、12質量部以上であることがより好ましい。 The curable composition of the present invention preferably contains 10 to 45 parts by mass of a photopolymerization initiator per 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound. The upper limit is preferably 40 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 11 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 12 parts by mass or more.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、後述する多官能チオール化合物の100質量部に対して、光重合開始剤を100~2000質量部含むことが好ましい。上限は1500質量部以下であることが好ましく、1000質量部以下であることがより好ましい。下限は150質量部以上であることが好ましく、200質量部以上であることがより好ましい。 The curable composition of the present invention preferably contains 100 to 2000 parts by mass of a photopolymerization initiator per 100 parts by mass of a multifunctional thiol compound described below. The upper limit is preferably 1500 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 1000 parts by mass or less. The lower limit is preferably 150 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 200 parts by mass or more.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、光重合開始剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.

<<多官能チオール化合物>>
 本発明の硬化性化合物は、多官能チオール化合物を含む。多官能チオール化合物とは、1分子中にチオール基を2個以上有する化合物のことである。
<<Multifunctional thiol compounds>>
The curable compound of the present invention includes a polyfunctional thiol compound. The polyfunctional thiol compound is a compound having two or more thiol groups in one molecule.

 多官能チオール化合物が有するチオール基の数は、2~10個であることが好ましく、2~6個であることがより好ましく、2~4個であることが更に好ましい。 The number of thiol groups in the polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 6, and even more preferably 2 to 4.

 多官能チオール化合物が有するチオール基は、1級チオール基、2級チオール基および3級チオール基が挙げられ、硬化性組成物の保存安定性を向上させることができ、かつ、湿度の高い環境下における、他の層との隣接面におけるシワの発生がより抑制された光学部材などの硬化物を形成することができるという理由から、2級チオール基であることが好ましい。なお、1級チオール基とは、チオール基が結合する炭素原子が第1級炭素原子であるチオール基を意味し、2級チオール基とは、チオール基が結合する炭素原子が第2級炭素原子であるチオール基を意味し、3級チオール基とは、チオール基が結合する炭素原子が第3級炭素原子であるチオール基を意味する。 The thiol group of the polyfunctional thiol compound may be a primary thiol group, a secondary thiol group, or a tertiary thiol group. A secondary thiol group is preferable because it can improve the storage stability of the curable composition and can form a cured product such as an optical component in which the occurrence of wrinkles on the surface adjacent to other layers is more suppressed in a humid environment. Note that a primary thiol group means a thiol group in which the carbon atom to which the thiol group is bonded is a primary carbon atom, a secondary thiol group means a thiol group in which the carbon atom to which the thiol group is bonded is a secondary carbon atom, and a tertiary thiol group means a thiol group in which the carbon atom to which the thiol group is bonded is a tertiary carbon atom.

 2級チオール基は、式(th-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。
The secondary thiol group is preferably a group represented by formula (th-1).

 式(th-1)中、*は結合手を表し、Rth1は、アルキル基を表す。 In formula (th-1), * represents a bond, and R th1 represents an alkyl group.

 Rth1が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましい。Rth1は、メチル基またはエチル基であることが好ましく、メチル基であることがより好ましい。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R th1 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and further preferably 1 to 3. R th1 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.

 多官能チオール化合物の分子量は、100~1000であることが好ましい。上限は、800以下であることが好ましく、600以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、150以上であることが好ましく、200以上であることがより好ましい。 The molecular weight of the polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably 100 to 1000. The upper limit is preferably 800 or less, and more preferably 600 or less. The lower limit is preferably 150 or more, and more preferably 200 or more.

 多官能チオール化合物は、式(T-1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
The polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a compound represented by formula (T-1).

 式(T-1)中、LT1は、n価の基を表し、RT1およびRT2は、それぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、nは2以上の整数を表す。 In formula (T-1), L T1 represents an n-valent group, R T1 and R T2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and n represents an integer of 2 or more.

 式(T-1)において、RT1およびRT2の一方は、水素原子で、他方はアルキル基であることが好ましい。
 RT1およびRT2が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましい。RT1およびRT2が表すアルキル基は、メチル基またはエチル基であることが好ましく、メチル基であることがより好ましい。
In formula (T-1), it is preferable that one of R T1 and R T2 is a hydrogen atom, and the other is an alkyl group.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group represented by R T1 and R T2 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and further preferably 1 to 3. The alkyl group represented by R T1 and R T2 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.

 式(T-1)のLT1が表すn価の基としては、炭化水素基、複素環基、-O-、-S-、-NRLT1-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-SO-もしくはこれらの組み合わせからなる基が挙げられる。RLT1は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、水素原子が好ましい。炭化水素基は、脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、芳香族炭化水素基であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、環状であってもよく、非環状であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、不飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基を有していなくてもよい。また、環状の脂肪族炭化水素基、および、芳香族炭化水素基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基は、単環であってもよく、縮合環であってもよい。複素環基としては、5員環または6員環が好ましい。複素環基は、脂肪族複素環基であっても、芳香族複素環基であってもよい。また、複素環基を構成するヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子などが挙げられる。 Examples of the n-valent group represented by L T1 in formula (T-1) include a hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, -O-, -S-, -NR LT1 -, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -SO 2 -, or a group consisting of a combination thereof. R LT1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom. The hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be cyclic or noncyclic. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent or may not have a substituent. The cyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. The heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The heterocyclic group may be an aliphatic heterocyclic group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. Examples of the heteroatom constituting the heterocyclic group include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.

 式(T-1)のnは2以上の整数を表し、2~10の整数であることが好ましく、2~6の整数であることがより好ましく、2~4の整数であることが更に好ましい。 In formula (T-1), n represents an integer of 2 or more, preferably an integer of 2 to 10, more preferably an integer of 2 to 6, and even more preferably an integer of 2 to 4.

 多官能チオール化合物の具体例としては、後述する実施例に記載の化合物、国際公開第2019/188652号の段落番号0100~0103に記載の化合物が挙げられる。多官能チオール化合物の市販品としては、PEMP(SC有機化学株式会社製)、サンセラー M(三新化学工業(株)製)、カレンズMT BD1、カレンズMT TPMB、カレンズMT PE1、カレンズMT NR1、(以上、(株)レゾナック製)などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of polyfunctional thiol compounds include the compounds described in the Examples below and the compounds described in paragraphs 0100 to 0103 of WO 2019/188652. Commercially available polyfunctional thiol compounds include PEMP (manufactured by SC Organic Chemical Co., Ltd.), Suncerar M (manufactured by Sanshin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Karenz MT BD1, Karenz MT TPMB, Karenz MT PE1, Karenz MT NR1 (all manufactured by Resonac Co., Ltd.), etc.

 硬化性組成物の全固形分中における多官能チオール化合物の含有量は0.1~5質量%が好ましい。下限は、シワの発生の抑制された硬化物を形成することができるという理由から0.3質量%以上であることが好ましく、0.5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、パターン形状の観点から3質量%以下であることが好ましく、2質量%以下であることがより好ましい。 The content of the polyfunctional thiol compound in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 5 mass%. The lower limit is preferably 0.3 mass% or more, and more preferably 0.5 mass% or more, because this allows for the formation of a cured product in which the occurrence of wrinkles is suppressed. The upper limit is preferably 3 mass% or less, and more preferably 2 mass% or less, from the viewpoint of the pattern shape.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、多官能チオール化合物を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The curable composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polyfunctional thiol compound, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are contained, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.

<<溶剤>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、溶剤を含有することが好ましい。溶剤としては、有機溶剤が挙げられる。溶剤の種類は、各成分の溶解性や硬化性組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はない。有機溶剤としては、エステル系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、炭化水素系溶剤などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0223を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、環状アルキル基が置換したエステル系溶剤、環状アルキル基が置換したケトン系溶剤も好ましく用いることもできる。有機溶剤の具体例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジクロロメタン、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、2-ペンタノン、3-ペンタノン、4-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、2-メチルシクロヘキサノン、3-メチルシクロヘキサノン、4-メチルシクロヘキサノン、シクロヘプタノン、シクロオクタノン、酢酸シクロヘキシル、シクロペンタノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、3-ブトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、プロピレングリコールジアセテート、3-メトキシブタノール、メチルエチルケトン、ガンマブチロラクトン、スルホラン、アニソール、1,4-ジアセトキシブタン、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセタート、二酢酸ブタン-1,3-ジイル、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセタート、ジアセトンアルコール(別名としてダイアセトンアルコール、4-ヒドロキシ-4-メチル-2-ペンタノン)、2-メトキシプロピルアセテート、2-メトキシ-1-プロパノール、イソプロピルアルコールなどが挙げられる。ただし有機溶剤としての芳香族炭化水素類(ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、エチルベンゼン等)は、環境面等の理由により低減したほうがよい場合がある(例えば、有機溶剤全量に対して、50質量ppm(parts per million)以下とすることもでき、10質量ppm以下とすることもでき、1質量ppm以下とすることもできる)。
<<Solvent>>
The curable composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent. Examples of the solvent include organic solvents. The type of solvent is not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coatability of the curable composition are satisfied. Examples of the organic solvent include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents. For details of these, reference can be made to paragraph number 0223 of International Publication No. 2015/166779, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. In addition, ester-based solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group and ketone-based solvents substituted with a cyclic alkyl group can also be preferably used. Specific examples of organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, 2-pentanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol Examples of the ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate include 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, propylene glycol diacetate, 3-methoxybutanol, methyl ethyl ketone, gamma butyrolactone, sulfolane, anisole, 1,4-diacetoxybutane, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, butane-1,3-diyl diacetate, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, diacetone alcohol (also known as diacetone alcohol and 4-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone), 2-methoxypropyl acetate, 2-methoxy-1-propanol, and isopropyl alcohol. However, there are cases where it is better to reduce the amount of aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) used as organic solvents for environmental reasons, etc. (for example, the amount can be 50 ppm (parts per million) by mass or less, 10 ppm by mass or less, or 1 ppm by mass or less, relative to the total amount of organic solvents).

 有機溶剤の金属含有量は少ないことが好ましい。有機溶剤の金属含有量は、例えば、10質量ppb(parts per billion)以下であることが好ましい。必要に応じて質量ppt(parts per trillion)レベルの有機溶剤を用いてもよく、そのような有機溶剤は,例えば、東洋合成社が提供している(化学工業日報、2015年11月13日)。 The metal content of the organic solvent is preferably low. The metal content of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 10 parts per billion (ppb) by mass or less. If necessary, organic solvents at the ppt (parts per trillion) by mass level may be used, and such organic solvents are provided, for example, by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (The Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015).

 有機溶剤から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、蒸留(分子蒸留や薄膜蒸留等)やフィルタを用いたろ過を挙げることができる。ろ過に用いるフィルタのフィルタ孔径としては、10μm以下が好ましく、5μm以下がより好ましく、3μm以下が更に好ましい。フィルタの材質は、ポリテトラフロロエチレン、ポリエチレンまたはナイロンが好ましい。 Methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include, for example, distillation (molecular distillation, thin-film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter. The filter used for filtration preferably has a pore size of 10 μm or less, more preferably 5 μm or less, and even more preferably 3 μm or less. The filter material is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.

 有機溶剤は、異性体(原子数が同じであるが構造が異なる化合物)が含まれていてもよい。また、異性体は、1種のみが含まれていてもよいし、複数種含まれていてもよい。 The organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures). In addition, the organic solvent may contain only one type of isomer, or multiple types of isomers.

 有機溶剤中の過酸化物の含有率が0.8mmol/L以下であることが好ましく、過酸化物を実質的に含まないことがより好ましい。 The peroxide content in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol/L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.

 硬化性組成物中における溶剤の含有量は、10~95質量%であることが好ましく、20~90質量%であることがより好ましく、30~90質量%であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the solvent in the curable composition is preferably 10 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 90% by mass.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、環境規制の観点から環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないことが好ましい。なお、本発明において、環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないとは、硬化性組成物中における環境規制物質の含有量が50質量ppm以下であることを意味し、30質量ppm以下であることが好ましく、10質量ppm以下であることが更に好ましく、1質量ppm以下であることが特に好ましい。環境規制物質は、例えば、ベンゼン;トルエン、キシレン等のアルキルベンゼン類;クロロベンゼン等のハロゲン化ベンゼン類等が挙げられる。これらは、REACH(Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of CHemicals)規則、PRTR(Pollutant Release and Transfer Register)法、VOC(Volatile Organic Compounds)規制等のもとに環境規制物質として登録されており、使用量や取り扱い方法が厳しく規制されている。これらの化合物は、硬化性組成物に用いられる各成分などを製造する際に溶媒として用いられることがあり、残留溶媒として硬化性組成物中に混入することがある。人への安全性、環境への配慮の観点よりこれらの物質は可能な限り低減することが好ましい。環境規制物質を低減する方法としては、系中を加熱や減圧して環境規制物質の沸点以上にして系中から環境規制物質を留去して低減する方法が挙げられる。また、少量の環境規制物質を留去する場合においては、効率を上げる為に該当溶媒と同等の沸点を有する溶媒と共沸させることも有用である。また、ラジカル重合性を有する化合物を含有する場合、減圧留去中にラジカル重合反応が進行して分子間で架橋してしまうことを抑制するために重合禁止剤等を添加して減圧留去してもよい。これらの留去方法は、原料の段階、原料を反応させた生成物(例えば、重合した後の樹脂溶液や多官能モノマー溶液)の段階、またはこれらの化合物を混ぜて作製した硬化性組成物の段階などのいずれの段階でも可能である。 From the viewpoint of environmental regulations, it is preferable that the curable composition of the present invention is substantially free of environmentally regulated substances. In the present invention, substantially free of environmentally regulated substances means that the content of environmentally regulated substances in the curable composition is 50 ppm by mass or less, preferably 30 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 10 ppm by mass or less, and particularly preferably 1 ppm by mass or less. Examples of environmentally regulated substances include benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene. These substances are registered as environmentally regulated substances under the REACH (Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals) regulations, the PRTR (Pollutant Release and Transfer Register) Act, the VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) regulations, etc., and their usage and handling methods are strictly regulated. These compounds may be used as solvents when producing each component used in the curable composition, and may be mixed into the curable composition as a residual solvent. From the viewpoint of human safety and environmental consideration, it is preferable to reduce these substances as much as possible. As a method for reducing the environmentally regulated substances, a method of reducing the environmentally regulated substances by heating or reducing the pressure in the system to a temperature above the boiling point of the environmentally regulated substances and distilling off the environmentally regulated substances from the system can be mentioned. In addition, when distilling off a small amount of environmentally regulated substances, it is useful to perform azeotropy with a solvent having a boiling point equivalent to that of the corresponding solvent in order to increase efficiency. In addition, when a radically polymerizable compound is contained, a polymerization inhibitor or the like may be added and then distilled off under reduced pressure in order to suppress the radical polymerization reaction from proceeding during distillation under reduced pressure and causing crosslinking between molecules. These distillation methods can be used at any stage, such as the stage of the raw materials, the stage of the product obtained by reacting the raw materials (for example, a resin solution or a polyfunctional monomer solution after polymerization), or the stage of the curable composition prepared by mixing these compounds.

<<環状エーテル基を有する化合物>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物を含有することができる。環状エーテル基としては、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基などが挙げられる。エポキシ基は、脂環式エポキシ基であってもよい。なお、脂環式エポキシ基とは、エポキシ環と飽和炭化水素環とが縮合した環状構造を有する1価の官能基のことを意味する。環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、エポキシ基を有する化合物(以下、エポキシ化合物ともいう)であることが好ましい。エポキシ化合物としては、1分子内にエポキシ基を1つ以上有する化合物が挙げられ、エポキシ基を2つ以上有する化合物が好ましい。エポキシ化合物はエポキシ基を1分子内に1~100個有する化合物であることが好ましい。エポキシ化合物に含まれるエポキシ基の上限は、例えば、10個以下とすることもでき、5個以下とすることもできる。エポキシ化合物に含まれるエポキシ基の下限は、2個以上が好ましい。エポキシ化合物としては、特開2013-011869号公報の段落番号0034~0036、特開2014-043556号公報の段落番号0147~0156、特開2014-089408号公報の段落番号0085~0092に記載された化合物、特開2017-179172号公報に記載された化合物を用いることもできる。
<<Compound Having Cyclic Ether Group>>
The curable composition of the present invention may contain a compound having a cyclic ether group. Examples of the cyclic ether group include an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group. The epoxy group may be an alicyclic epoxy group. The alicyclic epoxy group means a monovalent functional group having a cyclic structure in which an epoxy ring and a saturated hydrocarbon ring are condensed. The compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably a compound having an epoxy group (hereinafter also referred to as an epoxy compound). Examples of the epoxy compound include compounds having one or more epoxy groups in one molecule, and compounds having two or more epoxy groups are preferred. The epoxy compound is preferably a compound having 1 to 100 epoxy groups in one molecule. The upper limit of the epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound can be, for example, 10 or less, or 5 or less. The lower limit of the epoxy groups contained in the epoxy compound is preferably 2 or more. As the epoxy compound, the compounds described in paragraphs 0034 to 0036 of JP-A-2013-011869, paragraphs 0147 to 0156 of JP-A-2014-043556, and paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of JP-A-2014-089408, and the compounds described in JP-A-2017-179172 can also be used.

 環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、低分子化合物(例えば、分子量2000未満、さらには、分子量1000未満)でもよいし、高分子化合物(macromolecule)(例えば、分子量1000以上、ポリマーの場合は、重量平均分子量が1000以上)でもよい。環状エーテル基を有する化合物の重量平均分子量は、200~100000が好ましく、500~50000がより好ましい。重量平均分子量の上限は、10000以下がさらに好ましく、5000以下が特に好ましく、3000以下が一層好ましい。 The compound having a cyclic ether group may be a low molecular weight compound (e.g., a molecular weight of less than 2000, or even less than 1000) or a high molecular weight compound (macromolecule) (e.g., a molecular weight of 1000 or more, or in the case of a polymer, a weight average molecular weight of 1000 or more). The weight average molecular weight of the compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably 200 to 100,000, more preferably 500 to 50,000. The upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is more preferably 10,000 or less, particularly preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less.

 環状エーテル基を有する化合物の市販品としては、例えば、EHPE3150((株)ダイセル製)、EPICLON N-695(DIC(株)製)、マープルーフG-0150M、G-0105SA、G-0130SP、G-0250SP、G-1005S、G-1005SA、G-1010S、G-2050M、G-01100、G-01758(以上、日油(株)製、エポキシ基含有ポリマー)等が挙げられる。 Commercially available compounds having a cyclic ether group include, for example, EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation), EPICLON N-695 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), Marproof G-0150M, G-0105SA, G-0130SP, G-0250SP, G-1005S, G-1005SA, G-1010S, G-2050M, G-01100, and G-01758 (all manufactured by NOF Corporation, epoxy group-containing polymers).

 硬化性組成物の全固形分中における環状エーテル基を有する化合物の含有量は、0.1~20質量%が好ましい。下限は、例えば0.5質量%以上がより好ましく、1質量%以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、例えば、15質量%以下がより好ましく、10質量%以下がさらに好ましい。環状エーテル基を有する化合物は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the compound having a cyclic ether group in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.1 to 20 mass%. The lower limit is, for example, more preferably 0.5 mass% or more, and even more preferably 1 mass% or more. The upper limit is, for example, more preferably 15 mass% or less, and even more preferably 10 mass% or less. Only one type of compound having a cyclic ether group may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.

<<紫外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含有することができる。紫外線吸収剤としては、共役ジエン化合物、アミノジエン化合物、サリシレート化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、アクリロニトリル化合物、ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン化合物、インドール化合物、トリアジン化合物、ジベンゾイル化合物などが挙げられる。このような化合物の具体例としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0179に記載の化合物、特開2021-178918号公報に記載の反応性トリアジン紫外線吸収剤、特開2022-007884号公報に記載の紫外線吸収剤、韓国公開特許第10-2022-0014454号公報に記載の化合物、特開2023-013321号公報に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。硬化性組成物の全固形分中における紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~5質量%がより好ましい。本発明において、紫外線吸収剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Ultraviolet absorbing agent>>
The curable composition of the present invention may contain an ultraviolet absorber. Examples of ultraviolet absorbers include conjugated diene compounds, aminodiene compounds, salicylate compounds, benzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, acrylonitrile compounds, hydroxyphenyltriazine compounds, indole compounds, triazine compounds, and dibenzoyl compounds. Specific examples of such compounds include the compounds described in paragraph 0179 of International Publication No. 2022/085485, the reactive triazine ultraviolet absorbers described in JP-A-2021-178918, the ultraviolet absorbers described in JP-A-2022-007884, the compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2022-0014454, and the compounds described in JP-A-2023-013321. The content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass. In the present invention, the ultraviolet absorbing agent may be used alone or in combination with two or more kinds. When two or more kinds are used, it is preferable that the total amount is in the above range.

<<重合禁止剤>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、重合禁止剤を含有することができる。重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、tert-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン塩(アンモニウム塩、第一セリウム塩等)が挙げられる。中でも、p-メトキシフェノールが好ましい。硬化性組成物の全固形分中における重合禁止剤の含有量は、0.0001~5質量%が好ましい。重合禁止剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Polymerization inhibitor>>
The curable composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization inhibitor. Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), and N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salt (ammonium salt, cerous salt, etc.). Among these, p-methoxyphenol is preferred. The content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass. The polymerization inhibitor may be one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the total amount is preferably within the above range.

<<シランカップリング剤>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、シランカップリング剤を含有することができる。シランカップリング剤としては、加水分解性基を有するシラン化合物が挙げられ、加水分解性基とそれ以外の官能基とを有するシラン化合物であることが好ましい。加水分解性基とは、ケイ素原子に直結し、加水分解反応及び縮合反応の少なくともいずれかによってシロキサン結合を生じ得る置換基をいう。加水分解性基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基などが挙げられ、アルコキシ基が好ましい。すなわち、シランカップリング剤は、アルコキシシリル基を有する化合物が好ましい。また、加水分解性基以外の官能基としては、例えば、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、メルカプト基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アミノ基、ウレイド基、スルフィド基、イソシアネート基、フェニル基などが挙げられ、アミノ基、(メタ)アクリロイル基およびエポキシ基が好ましい。シランカップリング剤の具体例としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0177に記載の化合物、特開2019-183020号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。硬化性組成物の全固形分中におけるシランカップリング剤の含有量は、0.01~15.0質量%が好ましく、0.05~10.0質量%がより好ましい。シランカップリング剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Silane coupling agents>>
The curable composition of the present invention may contain a silane coupling agent. Examples of the silane coupling agent include silane compounds having a hydrolyzable group, and it is preferable that the silane coupling agent is a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups. The hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can generate a siloxane bond by at least one of a hydrolysis reaction and a condensation reaction. Examples of the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, and an acyloxy group, and an alkoxy group is preferable. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group. In addition, examples of functional groups other than the hydrolyzable group include a vinyl group, a (meth)allyl group, a (meth)acryloyl group, a mercapto group, an epoxy group, an oxetanyl group, an amino group, a ureido group, a sulfide group, an isocyanate group, and a phenyl group, and an amino group, a (meth)acryloyl group, and an epoxy group are preferable. Specific examples of the silane coupling agent include the compounds described in paragraph 0177 of International Publication No. 2022/085485 and the compounds described in JP-A-2019-183020. The content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.01 to 15.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 10.0% by mass. The silane coupling agent may be one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.

<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、界面活性剤を含有することができる。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用することができる。界面活性剤はシリコーン系界面活性剤またはフッ素系界面活性剤であることが好ましく、シリコーン系界面活性剤であることがより好ましい。界面活性剤については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0238~0245に記載された界面活性剤を参照することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<<Surfactants>>
The curable composition of the present invention may contain a surfactant. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as fluorine-based surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, anionic surfactants, and silicone-based surfactants may be used. The surfactant is preferably a silicone-based surfactant or a fluorine-based surfactant, and more preferably a silicone-based surfactant. For the surfactant, reference may be made to the surfactants described in paragraphs 0238 to 0245 of WO 2015/166779, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0167~0173に記載の化合物を用いることができる。 As fluorosurfactants, the compounds described in paragraphs 0167 to 0173 of WO 2022/085485 can be used.

 ノニオン系界面活性剤としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0174に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Nonionic surfactants include the compounds described in paragraph 0174 of WO 2022/085485.

 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、DOWSIL SH8400、SH8400 FLUID、FZ-2122、67 Additive、74 Additive、M Additive、SF 8419 OIL(以上、ダウ・東レ(株)製)、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、KP-341、KF-6000、KF-6001、KF-6002、KF-6003(以上、信越化学工業(株)製)、BYK-307、BYK-322、BYK-323、BYK-330、BYK-333、BYK-3760、BYK-UV3510(以上、ビックケミー社製)等が挙げられる。シリコーン系界面活性剤には下記構造の化合物を用いることもできる。
Silicone surfactants include DOWSIL SH8400, SH8400 FLUID, FZ-2122, 67 Additive, 74 Additive, M Additive, and SF 8419. OIL (all manufactured by Dow Toray Co., Ltd.), TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (all manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials, Inc.), KP-341, KF-6000, KF-6001, KF-6002, KF-6003 (all manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-333, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 (all manufactured by BYK-Chemie), etc. As the silicone surfactant, a compound having the following structure can also be used.

 硬化性組成物の全固形分中における界面活性剤の含有量は、0.001質量%~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~3.0質量%がより好ましい。界面活性剤は、1種類のみでもよく、2種類以上でもよい。2種類以上の場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3.0% by mass. The surfactant may be one type or two or more types. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount is within the above range.

<<酸化防止剤>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、酸化防止剤を含有することができる。酸化防止剤としては、フェノール化合物、亜リン酸エステル化合物、チオエーテル化合物などが挙げられる。フェノール化合物としては、フェノール系酸化防止剤として知られる任意のフェノール化合物を使用することができる。好ましいフェノール化合物としては、ヒンダードフェノール化合物が挙げられる。フェノール性ヒドロキシ基に隣接する部位(オルト位)に置換基を有する化合物が好ましい。前述の置換基としては炭素数1~22の置換又は無置換のアルキル基が好ましい。また、酸化防止剤は、同一分子内にフェノール基と亜リン酸エステル基を有する化合物も好ましい。また、酸化防止剤は、リン系酸化防止剤も好適に使用することができる。リン系酸化防止剤としてはトリス[2-[[2,4,8,10-テトラキス(1,1-ジメチルエチル)ジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-6-イル]オキシ]エチル]アミン、トリス[2-[(4,6,9,11-テトラ-tert-ブチルジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-2-イル)オキシ]エチル]アミン、亜リン酸エチルビス(2,4-ジ-tert-ブチル-6-メチルフェニル)などが挙げられる。酸化防止剤の市販品としては、例えば、アデカスタブ AO-20、アデカスタブ AO-30、アデカスタブ AO-40、アデカスタブ AO-50、アデカスタブ AO-50F、アデカスタブ AO-60、アデカスタブ AO-60G、アデカスタブ AO-80、アデカスタブ AO-330(以上、(株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。また、酸化防止剤は、特許第6268967号公報の段落番号0023~0048に記載された化合物、国際公開第2017/006600号に記載された化合物、国際公開第2017/164024号に記載された化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0059371号公報に記載された化合物を使用することもできる。硬化性組成物の全固形分中における酸化防止剤の含有量は、0.01~20質量%であることが好ましく、0.3~15質量%であることがより好ましい。酸化防止剤は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を用いてもよい。2種以上を用いる場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Antioxidants>>
The curable composition of the present invention may contain an antioxidant. Examples of the antioxidant include phenolic compounds, phosphite compounds, and thioether compounds. As the phenolic compound, any phenolic compound known as a phenolic antioxidant may be used. A preferred phenolic compound is a hindered phenolic compound. A compound having a substituent at the site (ortho position) adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group is preferred. As the aforementioned substituent, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms is preferred. In addition, the antioxidant is also preferably a compound having a phenolic group and a phosphite ester group in the same molecule. In addition, a phosphorus-based antioxidant may also be suitably used as the antioxidant. Examples of phosphorus-based antioxidants include tris[2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis(1,1-dimethylethyl)dibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-6-yl]oxy]ethyl]amine, tris[2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-2-yl)oxy]ethyl]amine, and ethylbis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl)phosphite. Commercially available antioxidants include, for example, Adeka STAB AO-20, Adeka STAB AO-30, Adeka STAB AO-40, Adeka STAB AO-50, Adeka STAB AO-50F, Adeka STAB AO-60, Adeka STAB AO-60G, Adeka STAB AO-80, and Adeka STAB AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation). In addition, the antioxidant may be a compound described in paragraphs 0023 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967, a compound described in International Publication No. WO 2017/006600, a compound described in International Publication No. WO 2017/164024, or a compound described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0059371. The content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the curable composition is preferably 0.01 to 20 mass%, more preferably 0.3 to 15 mass%. Only one type of antioxidant may be used, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total amount is in the above range.

<<その他成分>>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、必要に応じて、増感剤、可塑剤及びその他の助剤類(例えば、導電性粒子、充填剤、消泡剤、難燃剤、レベリング剤、剥離促進剤、香料、表面張力調整剤、連鎖移動剤など)を含有してもよい。これらの成分を適宜含有させることにより、膜物性などの性質を調整することができる。これらの成分は、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0182に記載の化合物を用いることができる。
<<Other ingredients>>
The curable composition of the present invention may contain, as necessary, a sensitizer, a plasticizer, and other auxiliaries (e.g., conductive particles, fillers, defoamers, flame retardants, leveling agents, peeling promoters, fragrances, surface tension regulators, chain transfer agents, etc.). By appropriately incorporating these components, properties such as film properties can be adjusted. As these components, the compounds described in paragraph 0182 of WO 2022/085485 can be used.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、テレフタル酸エステルを実質的に含まないことも好ましい。ここで、「実質的に含まない」とは、テレフタル酸エステルの含有量が、硬化性組成物の全量中、1000質量ppb以下であることを意味し、100質量ppb以下であることがより好ましく、ゼロであることが特に好ましい。 It is also preferable that the curable composition of the present invention is substantially free of terephthalic acid esters. Here, "substantially free" means that the content of terephthalic acid esters in the total amount of the curable composition is 1000 ppb by mass or less, more preferably 100 ppb by mass or less, and particularly preferably zero.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、環境規制の観点から、メラミンの含有量が10000質量ppm以下であることが好ましい。 In view of environmental regulations, it is preferable that the curable composition of the present invention has a melamine content of 10,000 ppm by mass or less.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、遊離の金属含有量が100ppm以下であることが好ましく、50ppm以下であることがより好ましい。また、遊離のハロゲン含有量は100ppm以下であることが好ましく、50ppm以下であることがより好ましい。硬化性組成物中の遊離の金属やハロゲンの低減方法としては、イオン交換水による洗浄、ろ過、限外ろ過、イオン交換樹脂による精製等の方法が挙げられる。 The curable composition of the present invention preferably has a free metal content of 100 ppm or less, more preferably 50 ppm or less. The free halogen content is preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 50 ppm or less. Methods for reducing free metals and halogens in the curable composition include washing with ion-exchanged water, filtration, ultrafiltration, and purification with ion-exchange resins.

 環境規制の観点から、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用が規制されることがある。本発明の硬化性組成物において、上記した化合物の含有率を小さくする場合、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸)及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸)及びその塩の含有率は、硬化性組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01ppb~1,000ppbの範囲であることが好ましく、0.05ppb~500ppbの範囲であることがより好ましく、0.1ppb~300ppbの範囲であることが更に好ましい。本発明の硬化性組成物は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まなくてもよい。例えば、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物を用いることで、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まない硬化性組成物を選択してもよい。規制化合物の代替となりうる化合物としては、例えば、パーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数の違いによって規制対象から除外された化合物が挙げられる。ただし、上記した内容は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用を妨げるものではない。本発明の硬化性組成物は、許容される最大の範囲内で、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を含んでもよい。 From the viewpoint of environmental regulations, the use of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts may be restricted. When the content of the above-mentioned compounds is reduced in the curable composition of the present invention, the content of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid (particularly perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and its salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid (particularly perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and its salts is preferably in the range of 0.01 ppb to 1,000 ppb, more preferably in the range of 0.05 ppb to 500 ppb, and even more preferably in the range of 0.1 ppb to 300 ppb, based on the total solid content of the curable composition. The curable composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts. For example, by using a compound that can be a substitute for perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and a compound that can be a substitute for perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt, a curable composition that is substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt may be selected. Examples of compounds that can be a substitute for regulated compounds include compounds that are excluded from the scope of regulation due to the difference in the number of carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group. However, the above content does not prevent the use of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt. The curable composition of the present invention may contain perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylic acid and its salt within the maximum allowable range.

 環境規制の観点から、含フッ素化合物の使用が規制されることがある。硬化性組成物中の含フッ素化合物の含有量を少なくする場合、硬化性組成物中の含フッ素化合物の含有量は5質量%以下であることが好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.1質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。硬化性組成物は、含フッ素化合物を実質的に含まなくてもよい。 The use of fluorine-containing compounds may be restricted from the perspective of environmental regulations. When the content of fluorine-containing compounds in the curable composition is reduced, the content of fluorine-containing compounds in the curable composition is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, and even more preferably 0.1% by mass or less. The curable composition may be substantially free of fluorine-containing compounds.

 本発明の硬化性組成物の含水率は、通常3質量%以下であり、0.01~1.5質量%が好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%の範囲であることがより好ましい。含水率は、カールフィッシャー法にて測定することができる。 The water content of the curable composition of the present invention is usually 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, and more preferably in the range of 0.1 to 1.0% by mass. The water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.

 本発明の硬化性組成物は、膜面状(平坦性など)の調整、膜厚の調整などを目的として粘度を調整して用いることができる。粘度の値は必要に応じて適宜選択することができるが、例えば、25℃において0.3mPa・s~50mPa・sが好ましく、0.5mPa・s~20mPa・sがより好ましい。粘度の測定方法としては、例えば、コーンプレートタイプの粘度計を使用し、25℃に温度調整を施した状態で測定することができる。 The curable composition of the present invention can be used by adjusting the viscosity for the purpose of adjusting the film surface state (flatness, etc.) and film thickness. The viscosity value can be selected appropriately as needed, but for example, a value of 0.3 mPa·s to 50 mPa·s at 25°C is preferable, and 0.5 mPa·s to 20 mPa·s is more preferable. The viscosity can be measured, for example, using a cone-plate type viscometer with the temperature adjusted to 25°C.

<<収容容器>>
 硬化性組成物の収容容器としては、特に限定はなく、公知の収容容器を用いることができる。また、収容容器として、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落0187に記載の容器を用いることができる。
<<Storage container>>
The container for storing the curable composition is not particularly limited, and a known container can be used. In addition, the container described in paragraph 0187 of WO 2022/085485 can be used as the container.

<硬化性組成物の調製方法>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、前述の成分を混合して調製できる。硬化性組成物の調製に際しては、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解および/または分散して硬化性組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じて、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液または分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して硬化性組成物を調製してもよい。
<Method of preparing curable composition>
The curable composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the above-mentioned components. When preparing the curable composition, all the components may be simultaneously dissolved and/or dispersed in a solvent to prepare the curable composition, or, if necessary, each component may be appropriately prepared as two or more solutions or dispersions, which are mixed at the time of use (at the time of application) to prepare the curable composition.

 また、硬化性組成物の調製に際して、粒子を分散させるプロセスを含むことが好ましい。粒子を分散させるプロセスにおいて、粒子の分散に用いる機械力としては、圧縮、圧搾、衝撃、剪断、キャビテーションなどが挙げられる。これらプロセスの具体例としては、ビーズミル、サンドミル、ロールミル、ボールミル、ペイントシェーカー、マイクロフルイダイザー、高速インペラー、サンドグラインダー、フロージェットミキサー、高圧湿式微粒化、超音波分散などが挙げられる。またサンドミル(ビーズミル)における粒子の粉砕においては、径の小さいビーズを使用する、ビーズの充填率を大きくする事等により粉砕効率を高めた条件で処理することが好ましい。また、粉砕処理後にろ過、遠心分離などで粗粒子を除去することが好ましい。また、粒子を分散させるプロセスおよび分散機は、「分散技術大全集、株式会社情報機構発行、2005年7月15日」や「サスペンション(固/液分散系)を中心とした分散技術と工業的応用の実際 総合資料集、経営開発センター出版部発行、1978年10月10日」、特開2015-157893号公報の段落番号0022に記載のプロセス及び分散機を好適に使用出来る。また粒子を分散させるプロセスにおいては、ソルトミリング工程にて粒子の微細化処理を行ってもよい。ソルトミリング工程に用いられる素材、機器、処理条件等は、例えば、特開2015-194521号公報、特開2012-046629号公報の記載を参酌できる。分散に使用するビーズの素材としては、ジルコニア、メノウ、石英、チタニア、タングステンカーバイト、窒化ケイ素、アルミナ、ステンレス鋼およびガラスが挙げられる。また、ビーズには、モース硬度が2以上の無機化合物を使用することもできる。硬化性組成物中に上記ビーズが1~10000ppm含まれていてもよい。 In addition, when preparing the curable composition, it is preferable to include a process for dispersing particles. In the process for dispersing particles, mechanical forces used for dispersing particles include compression, squeezing, impact, shear, and cavitation. Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high-speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high-pressure wet atomization, and ultrasonic dispersion. In addition, when grinding particles in a sand mill (bead mill), it is preferable to use beads with a small diameter and increase the bead packing rate to perform processing under conditions that increase the grinding efficiency. In addition, it is preferable to remove coarse particles by filtration, centrifugation, or the like after the grinding process. In addition, the process and dispersing machine for dispersing particles can be suitably used as described in "Dispersion Technology Encyclopedia, published by Information Technology Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005" or "Dispersion Technology and Industrial Application Practice Focusing on Suspension (Solid/Liquid Dispersion System) - Comprehensive Data Collection, published by Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978", and JP2015-157893, paragraph number 0022. In the process for dispersing particles, the particles may be refined in a salt milling process. For the materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling process, the descriptions in, for example, JP2015-194521A and JP2012-046629A can be referred to. Examples of materials for beads used for dispersion include zirconia, agate, quartz, titania, tungsten carbide, silicon nitride, alumina, stainless steel, and glass. The beads may also be made of an inorganic compound with a Mohs hardness of 2 or more. The curable composition may contain 1 to 10,000 ppm of the beads.

 硬化性組成物の調製にあたり、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、硬化性組成物をフィルタでろ過することが好ましい。ろ過に用いるフィルタの種類およびろ過方法としては、国際公開第2022/085485号の段落番号0196~0199に記載のフィルタおよびろ過方法が挙げられる。 When preparing the curable composition, it is preferable to filter the curable composition with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign matter and reducing defects. Examples of the types of filters and filtration methods used for filtration include the filters and filtration methods described in paragraphs 0196 to 0199 of WO 2022/085485.

<硬化物>
 本発明の硬化物は、上述した本発明の硬化性組成物を用いて得られたものである。本発明の硬化物は、マイクロレンズなどの光学部材に好ましく用いることができる。
<Cured Product>
The cured product of the present invention is obtained by using the above-mentioned curable composition of the present invention. The cured product of the present invention can be preferably used for optical members such as microlenses.

 本発明の硬化物の波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率の最小値は75%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、85%以上であることが更に好ましく、90%以上であることが特に好ましい。
 本発明の硬化物の波長400~700nmの範囲の平均透過率は75%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、85%以上であることが更に好ましく、90%以上であることが特に好ましい。
 本発明の硬化物の、波長550nmの光に対する屈折率は1.5~2.2であることが好ましい。上限は、2.1以下であることが好ましく、2.0以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、1.7以上であることが好ましく、1.8以上であることがより好ましい。
The minimum transmittance of the cured product of the present invention in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and particularly preferably 90% or more.
The average transmittance of the cured product of the present invention in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and particularly preferably 90% or more.
The refractive index of the cured product of the present invention with respect to light having a wavelength of 550 nm is preferably 1.5 to 2.2. The upper limit is preferably 2.1 or less, and more preferably 2.0 or less. The lower limit is preferably 1.7 or more, and more preferably 1.8 or more.

<光学部材>
 本発明の硬化性組成物は、光学部材に用いることができる。光学部材としては、マイクロレンズ、導波路、反射防止膜などが挙げられ、マイクロレンズであることが好ましい。本発明の光学部材は、固体撮像素子用のマイクロレンズとして特に好ましく用いられる。
<Optical components>
The curable composition of the present invention can be used for optical members. Examples of the optical members include microlenses, waveguides, and anti-reflection films, and the microlenses are preferred. The optical members of the present invention are particularly preferably used as microlenses for solid-state imaging devices.

 本発明の光学部材をマイクロレンズとして用いる場合、本発明の硬化性組成物をレンズ状に加工して用いることが好ましい。すなわち、マイクロレンズは、本発明の硬化性組成物をレンズ状に加工して得られたものであることが好ましい。 When the optical member of the present invention is used as a microlens, it is preferable to process the curable composition of the present invention into a lens shape before use. In other words, it is preferable that the microlens is obtained by processing the curable composition of the present invention into a lens shape.

 マイクロレンズについては、波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率の最小値は75%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、85%以上であることが更に好ましく、90%以上であることが特に好ましい。マイクロレンズについては、波長400~700nmの範囲の平均透過率は75%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、85%以上であることが更に好ましく、90%以上であることが特に好ましい。 For microlenses, the minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and especially preferably 90% or more. For microlenses, the average transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more, even more preferably 85% or more, and especially preferably 90% or more.

 マイクロレンズの波長550nmの光に対する屈折率は1.5~2.2であることが好ましい。上限は、2.1以下であることが好ましく、2.0以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、1.7以上であることが好ましく、1.8以上であることがより好ましい。 The refractive index of the microlens for light with a wavelength of 550 nm is preferably 1.5 to 2.2. The upper limit is preferably 2.1 or less, and more preferably 2.0 or less. The lower limit is preferably 1.7 or more, and more preferably 1.8 or more.

 マイクロレンズのレンズ形状としては、特に限定されず、光学系設計により導出された様々な形状を取ることができる。例えば、凸形状、凹形状などが挙げられる。また、レンズの曲率半径は、特に限定されず、所望の効果を奏する範囲内で適宜設定することが好ましい。 The lens shape of the microlens is not particularly limited, and can take a variety of shapes derived from optical system design. Examples include convex and concave shapes. In addition, the radius of curvature of the lens is not particularly limited, and is preferably set appropriately within a range that produces the desired effect.

 マイクロレンズの厚みは、0.3~1.5μmであることが好ましい。上限は、1.3μm以下であることが好ましく、1.0μm以下であることがより好ましい。下限は、0.4μm以上であることが好ましく、0.5μm以上であることがより好ましい。ここでマイクロレンズの厚みとは、マイクロレンズの最も厚い部分の厚みのことを意味する。例えば両面凸レンズの場合、一方の凸面の頂点から他方の凸面の頂点までの距離のことである。 The thickness of the microlens is preferably 0.3 to 1.5 μm. The upper limit is preferably 1.3 μm or less, and more preferably 1.0 μm or less. The lower limit is preferably 0.4 μm or more, and more preferably 0.5 μm or more. Here, the thickness of the microlens refers to the thickness of the thickest part of the microlens. For example, in the case of a double-convex lens, it refers to the distance from the apex of one convex surface to the apex of the other convex surface.

 マクロレンズの表面には保護層が設けられていてもよい。保護層を設けることで、酸素遮断化、低反射化、親疎水化、特定波長の光(紫外線、赤外線等)の遮蔽等の種々の機能を付与することができる。保護層の厚さとしては、0.01~10μmが好ましく、0.1~5μmがより好ましい。保護層の形成方法としては、保護層形成用の樹脂組成物を塗布して形成する方法、化学気相蒸着法、成型した樹脂を接着材で貼りつける方法等が挙げられる。保護層を構成する成分としては、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、ポリオール樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、アラミド樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、アルキド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、変性シリコーン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、ポリアクリロニトリル樹脂、セルロース樹脂、Si、C、W、Al、Mo、SiO、Siなどが挙げられ、これらの成分を二種以上含有しても良い。例えば、酸素遮断化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層はポリオール樹脂と、SiOと、Siを含むことが好ましい。また、低反射化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層は(メタ)アクリル樹脂とフッ素樹脂を含むことが好ましい。 A protective layer may be provided on the surface of the macro lens. By providing a protective layer, various functions such as oxygen blocking, low reflection, hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity, and blocking of light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, infrared rays, etc.) can be imparted. The thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 μm, and more preferably 0.1 to 5 μm. Methods for forming the protective layer include a method of forming the protective layer by applying a resin composition for forming the protective layer, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of attaching a molded resin with an adhesive. The components constituting the protective layer include (meth)acrylic resin, ene-thiol resin, polycarbonate resin, polyether resin, polyarylate resin, polysulfone resin, polyethersulfone resin, polyphenylene resin, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resin, polyimide resin, polyamideimide resin, polyolefin resin, cyclic olefin resin, polyester resin, styrene resin, polyol resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, melamine resin, urethane resin, aramid resin, polyamide resin, alkyd resin, epoxy resin, modified silicone resin, fluorine resin, polyacrylonitrile resin, cellulose resin, Si, C, W, Al 2 O 3 , Mo, SiO 2 , and Si 2 N 4 , and may contain two or more of these components. For example, in the case of a protective layer intended for oxygen blocking, the protective layer preferably contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 , and Si 2 N 4. In addition, in the case of a protective layer intended for low reflection, the protective layer preferably contains a (meth)acrylic resin and a fluorine resin.

 樹脂組成物を塗布して保護層を形成する場合、樹脂組成物の塗布方法としては、スピンコート法、キャスト法、スクリーン印刷法、インクジェット法等の公知の方法を用いることができる。樹脂組成物に含まれる有機溶剤は、公知の有機溶剤(例えば、プロピレングリコール1-モノメチルエーテル2-アセテート、シクロペンタノン、乳酸エチル等)を用いることが出来る。保護層を化学気相蒸着法にて形成する場合、化学気相蒸着法としては、公知の化学気相蒸着法(熱化学気相蒸着法、プラズマ化学気相蒸着法、光化学気相蒸着法)を用いることができる。 When forming a protective layer by applying a resin composition, known methods such as spin coating, casting, screen printing, and inkjet can be used as a method for applying the resin composition. Known organic solvents (e.g., propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate, cyclopentanone, ethyl lactate, etc.) can be used as the organic solvent contained in the resin composition. When forming the protective layer by chemical vapor deposition, known chemical vapor deposition methods (thermal chemical vapor deposition, plasma chemical vapor deposition, photochemical vapor deposition) can be used as the chemical vapor deposition method.

 保護層は、必要に応じて、有機・無機微粒子、特定波長の光(例えば、紫外線、赤外線等)の吸収剤、屈折率調整剤、酸化防止剤、密着剤、界面活性剤等の添加剤を含有しても良い。有機・無機微粒子の例としては、例えば、高分子微粒子(例えば、シリコーン樹脂微粒子、ポリスチレン微粒子、メラミン樹脂微粒子)、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化インジウム、酸化アルミニウム、窒化チタン、酸窒化チタン、フッ化マグネシウム、中空シリカ、シリカ、炭酸カルシウム、硫酸バリウム等が挙げられる。特定波長の光の吸収剤は公知の吸収剤を用いることができる。これらの添加剤の含有量は適宜調整できるが、保護層の全質量に対して0.1~70質量%が好ましく、1~60質量%がさらに好ましい。 The protective layer may contain additives such as organic or inorganic fine particles, absorbents for light of specific wavelengths (e.g., ultraviolet light, infrared light, etc.), refractive index adjusters, antioxidants, adhesion agents, and surfactants, as necessary. Examples of organic or inorganic fine particles include polymer fine particles (e.g., silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, titanium oxynitride, magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, and barium sulfate. Known absorbents can be used as absorbents for light of specific wavelengths. The content of these additives can be adjusted as appropriate, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass, and more preferably 1 to 60% by mass, based on the total mass of the protective layer.

 保護層としては、特開2017-151176号公報の段落番号0073~0092に記載の保護層を用いることもできる。 The protective layer may be the one described in paragraphs 0073 to 0092 of JP2017-151176A.

<マイクロレンズの製造方法>
 次に、マイクロレンズの製造方法について説明する。マイクロレンズの製造方法は、支持体上に上述した本発明の硬化性組成物を塗布して組成物層を形成する工程と、硬化性組成物層をレンズ形状に加工する工程とを含むことが好ましい。以下、各工程について説明する。
<Method of manufacturing microlenses>
Next, a method for producing a microlens will be described. The method for producing a microlens preferably includes a step of forming a composition layer by applying the above-mentioned curable composition of the present invention onto a support, and a step of processing the curable composition layer into a lens shape. Each step will be described below.

(組成物層を形成する工程)
 組成物層を形成する工程では、本発明の硬化性組成物を用いて、支持体上に組成物層を形成する。支持体としては、ガラス基板、シリコン基板などが挙げられ、シリコン基板であることが好ましい。また、シリコン基板には、電荷結合素子(CCD)、相補型金属酸化膜半導体(CMOS)、透明導電膜、カラーフィルタなどの光学フィルタなどが形成されていてもよい。また、シリコン基板には、各画素を隔離するブラックマトリクスが形成されている場合もある。
(Step of forming composition layer)
In the step of forming a composition layer, the curable composition of the present invention is used to form a composition layer on a support. Examples of the support include a glass substrate and a silicon substrate, and a silicon substrate is preferable. In addition, a charge-coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, an optical filter such as a color filter, etc. may be formed on the silicon substrate. In addition, a black matrix that isolates each pixel may be formed on the silicon substrate.

 硬化性組成物の塗布方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、滴下法(ドロップキャスト);スリットコート法;スプレー法;ロールコート法;回転塗布法(スピンコーティング);流延塗布法;スリットアンドスピン法;プリウェット法(たとえば、特開2009-145395号公報に記載されている方法);インクジェット(例えばオンデマンド方式、ピエゾ方式、サーマル方式)、ノズルジェット等の吐出系印刷、フレキソ印刷、スクリーン印刷、グラビア印刷、反転オフセット印刷、メタルマスク印刷法などの各種印刷法;金型等を用いた転写法;ナノインプリント法などが挙げられる。インクジェットでの適用方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば「広がる・使えるインクジェット-特許に見る無限の可能性-、2005年2月発行、住ベテクノリサーチ」に示された方法(特に115ページ~133ページ)や、特開2003-262716号公報、特開2003-185831号公報、特開2003-261827号公報、特開2012-126830号公報、特開2006-169325号公報などに記載の方法が挙げられる。また、硬化性組成物の塗布方法については、国際公開第2017/030174号、国際公開第2017/018419号の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。  The curable composition can be applied by any known method. Examples of the method include the drop casting method, slit coating method, spray method, roll coating method, spin coating method, casting method, slit and spin method, pre-wetting method (for example, the method described in JP 2009-145395 A), various printing methods such as ejection printing such as inkjet (for example, on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method) and nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, and metal mask printing method, transfer method using a mold, etc., and nanoimprint method. The application method using an inkjet printer is not particularly limited, and examples of the method include those described in "Expanding and Usable Inkjet Printing - Infinite Possibilities Seen in Patents -, published in February 2005 by Sumibe Techno Research" (particularly pages 115 to 133), and those described in JP-A-2003-262716, JP-A-2003-185831, JP-A-2003-261827, JP-A-2012-126830, and JP-A-2006-169325. In addition, the description of the application method of the curable composition can be found in WO 2017/030174 and WO 2017/018419, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 支持体上に形成した組成物層は、乾燥(プリベーク)してもよい。プリベークを行う場合、プリベーク温度は、100℃以下が好ましく、90℃以下がより好ましく、80℃以下が更に好ましく、70℃以下が特に好ましい。下限は、例えば、40℃以上とすることができる。プリベーク時間は、10~3600秒が好ましい。プリベークは、ホットプレート、オーブン等で行うことができる。 The composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked). When prebaking is performed, the prebaking temperature is preferably 100°C or less, more preferably 90°C or less, even more preferably 80°C or less, and particularly preferably 70°C or less. The lower limit can be, for example, 40°C or more. The prebaking time is preferably 10 to 3600 seconds. Prebaking can be performed using a hot plate, an oven, etc.

(レンズ形状に加工する工程)
 組成物層をレンズ形状に加工する方法としては、従来公知の加工方法を用いることができる。例えば、転写法、インプリント法、熱だれ法などを用いて製造できる。
(Process to form lens shape)
The composition layer can be processed into a lens shape by a conventionally known processing method, such as a transfer method, an imprint method, or a heat drip method.

 転写法では、支持体上に形成した組成物層を硬化処理して硬化物層を形成し、この硬化物層上にレジスト層を形成し、このレジスト層をレンズ形状にパターン形成し、このパターン形成されたレジスト層をマスクとして硬化物層をドライエッチングして、レンズ形状を硬化物層に転写して製造することができる。転写法を用いたレンズの製造方法については、特開2006-073605号公報、特開2006-190903号公報、特開2008-281414号公報、特開2014-029524号公報などに記載された方法を用いることもでき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In the transfer method, a composition layer formed on a support is cured to form a cured layer, a resist layer is formed on the cured layer, the resist layer is patterned into a lens shape, and the cured layer is dry etched using the patterned resist layer as a mask to transfer the lens shape to the cured layer. Lenses can be manufactured by using the transfer method in the methods described in JP 2006-073605 A, JP 2006-190903 A, JP 2008-281414 A, JP 2014-029524 A, and the like, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

 インプリント法では、支持体上に形成した組成物層上にパターンを有するモールドを押し当てて組成物層をモールドと支持体とで挟持し、このように挟持した状態で組成物層を露光して硬化させ、その後、支持体からモールドを剥離して製造することができる。 In the imprint method, a mold having a pattern is pressed onto a composition layer formed on a support, the composition layer is sandwiched between the mold and the support, the composition layer is exposed to light in this sandwiched state and cured, and then the mold is peeled off from the support to produce the product.

 熱だれ法では、支持体上に形成した組成物層を硬化処理して硬化物層を形成し、この硬化物層を加熱し、硬化物層の表面を熱だれさせることにより、硬化物層をレンズ形状に加工することができる。 In the thermal dripping method, a composition layer formed on a support is cured to form a cured layer, which is then heated to cause thermal dripping of the surface of the cured layer, allowing the cured layer to be processed into a lens shape.

 レンズ形状に加工する工程では、組成物層を露光する工程を含んでいてもよい。露光は組成物層の硬化処理として用いられる。露光は、組成物層に対して放射線を照射して行うことが好ましい。放射線としては、g線、i線等が挙げられる。また、波長300nm以下の光(好ましくは波長180~300nmの光)を用いることもできる。波長300nm以下の光としては、KrF線(波長248nm)、ArF線(波長193nm)などが挙げられ、KrF線(波長248nm)が好ましい。また、300nm以上の長波な光源も利用できる。 The process of processing into a lens shape may include a process of exposing the composition layer to light. Exposure is used as a curing process for the composition layer. Exposure is preferably performed by irradiating the composition layer with radiation. Examples of radiation include g-line and i-line. Light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light with a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used. Examples of light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less include KrF line (wavelength 248 nm) and ArF line (wavelength 193 nm), with KrF line (wavelength 248 nm) being preferred. Long-wavelength light sources of 300 nm or more can also be used.

 また、露光に際して、光を連続的に照射して露光してもよく、パルス的に照射して露光(パルス露光)してもよい。なお、パルス露光とは、短時間(例えば、ミリ秒レベル以下)のサイクルで光の照射と休止を繰り返して露光する方式の露光方法のことである。 In addition, during exposure, light may be applied continuously or in pulses (pulse exposure). Pulse exposure is an exposure method in which light is applied and paused repeatedly in short cycles (e.g., milliseconds or less).

 照射量(露光量)は、例えば、0.03~2.5J/cmが好ましく、0.05~1.0J/cmがより好ましい。露光時における酸素濃度については適宜選択することができ、大気下で行う他に、例えば酸素濃度が19体積%以下の低酸素雰囲気下(例えば、15体積%、5体積%、または、実質的に無酸素)で露光してもよく、酸素濃度が21体積%を超える高酸素雰囲気下(例えば、22体積%、30体積%、または、50体積%)で露光してもよい。また、露光照度は適宜設定することが可能であり、通常1000W/m~100000W/m(例えば、5000W/m、15000W/m、または、35000W/m)の範囲から選択することができる。酸素濃度と露光照度は適宜条件を組み合わせてよく、例えば、酸素濃度10体積%で照度10000W/m、酸素濃度35体積%で照度20000W/mなどとすることができる。 The irradiation amount (exposure amount) is, for example, preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J/cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J/cm 2. The oxygen concentration during exposure can be appropriately selected, and in addition to being performed under air, exposure may be performed under a low-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of 19 volume% or less (e.g., 15 volume%, 5 volume%, or substantially oxygen-free), or under a high-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration of more than 21 volume% (e.g., 22 volume%, 30 volume%, or 50 volume%). The exposure illuminance can be appropriately set, and can usually be selected from the range of 1000 W/m 2 to 100,000 W/m 2 (e.g., 5,000 W/m 2 , 15,000 W/m 2 , or 35,000 W/m 2 ). The oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined. For example, the oxygen concentration can be 10% by volume and the illuminance can be 10,000 W/m 2 , and the oxygen concentration can be 35% by volume and the illuminance can be 20,000 W/m 2 .

<固体撮像素子>
 本発明の光学部材は固体撮像素子に用いることができる。固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明の光学部材を備え、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
<Solid-state imaging element>
The optical member of the present invention can be used for a solid-state imaging device. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device is not particularly limited as long as it includes the optical member of the present invention and functions as a solid-state imaging device. For example, the following configurations can be mentioned.

 基板上に、固体撮像素子(CCD(電荷結合素子)イメージセンサ、CMOS(相補型金属酸化膜半導体)イメージセンサ等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、フォトダイオードおよび転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口した遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、デバイス保護膜上に、カラーフィルタを有する構成である。本発明の光学部材は、デバイス保護膜上であってカラーフィルタの下(基板に近い側)や、カラーフィルタ上に設けることができる。例えば、本発明の光学部材をマイクロレンズとして用いる場合には、カラーフィルタ上にマイクロレンズを設けることができる。 The optical element of the present invention has a structure in which a substrate is provided with a plurality of photodiodes constituting the light receiving area of a solid-state imaging element (such as a CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor or a CMOS (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor) image sensor) and a transfer electrode made of polysilicon or the like, a light-shielding film is provided on the photodiodes and the transfer electrode with only the light receiving portion of the photodiode being opened, a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light-shielding film so as to cover the entire light-shielding film and the light receiving portion of the photodiode, and a color filter is provided on the device protective film. The optical element of the present invention can be provided on the device protective film below the color filter (the side closer to the substrate) or on the color filter. For example, when the optical element of the present invention is used as a microlens, a microlens can be provided on the color filter.

 固体撮像素子において、カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各着色画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。この場合の隔壁は各着色画素よりも低屈折率であることが好ましい。このような構造を有する撮像装置の例としては、特開2012-227478号公報、特開2014-179577号公報、国際公開第2018/043654号に記載の装置が挙げられる。また、特開2019-211559号公報の中で示しているように固体撮像素子の構造内に紫外線吸収層を設けて耐光性を改良してもよい。固体撮像素子を備えた撮像装置は、デジタルカメラや、撮像機能を有する電子機器(携帯電話等)の他、車載カメラや監視カメラ用としても用いることができる。 In the solid-state imaging element, the color filter may have a structure in which each colored pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partitions, for example in a lattice pattern. In this case, it is preferable that the partitions have a lower refractive index than each colored pixel. Examples of imaging devices having such a structure include the devices described in JP 2012-227478 A, JP 2014-179577 A, and WO 2018/043654 A. In addition, as shown in JP 2019-211559 A, an ultraviolet absorbing layer may be provided in the structure of the solid-state imaging element to improve light resistance. Imaging devices equipped with solid-state imaging elements can be used for digital cameras, electronic devices with imaging functions (such as mobile phones), as well as in-vehicle cameras and surveillance cameras.

<画像表示装置>
 本発明の光学部材は画像表示装置に用いることができる。画像表示装置としては、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などが挙げられる。画像表示装置の定義や各画像表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木昭夫著、(株)工業調査会、1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田龍男編集、(株)工業調査会、1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。
<Image display device>
The optical member of the present invention can be used in an image display device. Examples of image display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence display devices. The definition of an image display device and details of each image display device are described, for example, in "Electronic Display Devices" (written by Akio Sasaki, published by Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd. in 1990) and "Display Devices" (written by Junsho Ibuki, published by Sangyo Tosho Co., Ltd. in 1989). Liquid crystal display devices are described, for example, in "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology" (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, published by Kogyo Chosakai Co., Ltd. in 1994). There is no particular limitation on the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied, and the present invention can be applied to various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the above-mentioned "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology."

 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。 The present invention will be explained in more detail below with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing contents, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below.

<分散液の製造>
(処方1)
 粒子を22.7質量部と、分散剤を固形分換算で6.1質量部と、溶剤を71.1質量部との混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.1mm径)を用いて3時間混合および分散した。その後、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて、圧力2000kg/cmおよび流量500g/minの条件の下、分散処理を行った。この分散処理を全10回まで繰り返して、分散液を得た。なお、粒子、分散剤および溶剤はそれぞれ下記表に示す素材を用いた。
<Preparation of Dispersion>
(Formulation 1)
A mixture of 22.7 parts by mass of particles, 6.1 parts by mass of dispersant (solid content equivalent), and 71.1 parts by mass of solvent was mixed and dispersed for 3 hours using a bead mill (zirconia beads 0.1 mm diameter). Thereafter, a dispersion treatment was carried out using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Japan BEE Co., Ltd.) equipped with a pressure reducing mechanism under conditions of a pressure of 2000 kg/ cm2 and a flow rate of 500 g/min. This dispersion treatment was repeated a total of 10 times to obtain a dispersion. The particles, dispersant, and solvent were made from the materials shown in the table below.

 上記表の略語で記載した素材の詳細は以下の通りである。 Details of the materials listed in the table above are as follows:

(粒子)
 P-1:TiO粒子(透明または白色の粒子、平均一次粒子径20nm)
 P-2:ZrO粒子(透明または白色の粒子、平均一次粒子径50nm)
(particle)
P-1: TiO2 particles (transparent or white particles, average primary particle size 20 nm)
P-2: ZrO2 particles (transparent or white particles, average primary particle size 50 nm)

(分散剤)
 D-1:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量24000、酸価48.7mgKOH/g)
 D-2:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量20000、酸価70.1mgKOH/g)
 D-3:(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量23000、酸価61.4mgKOH/g)
(Dispersant)
D-1: Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios, and the numbers attached to the side chains are the numbers of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 24,000, acid value: 48.7 mgKOH/g)
D-2: Resin having the following structure (the numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios, and the numbers attached to the side chains are the numbers of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 20,000, acid value: 70.1 mgKOH/g)
D-3: (The numbers attached to the main chain are molar ratios, and the numbers attached to the side chains are the numbers of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 23,000, acid value: 61.4 mgKOH/g)

(溶剤)
 S-1:シクロヘキサノン
(solvent)
S-1: Cyclohexanone

<硬化性組成物の製造>
 各素材を、以下に示す処方1~13の割合で混合し、孔径0.45μmのナイロン製フィルタ(日本ポール(株)製)でろ過して各硬化性組成物を製造した。以下の表において、硬化性組成物の全固形分中における粒子の含有量の値を「粒子濃度(質量%)」の欄に記載し、硬化性組成物の全固形分中におけるチオール化合物の含有量の値を「チオール化合物濃度(質量%)」の欄に記載し
<Preparation of Curable Composition>
Each material was mixed in the ratio of formulations 1 to 13 shown below, and filtered through a nylon filter with a pore size of 0.45 μm (manufactured by Nippon Pall Co., Ltd.) to produce each curable composition. In the following table, the content of particles in the total solid content of the curable composition is shown in the column "Particle concentration (mass%)", and the content of thiol compound in the total solid content of the curable composition is shown in the column "Thiol compound concentration (mass%)".








 上記硬化性組成物の処方を示す表中の略語で示す素材の詳細は下記の通りである。 Details of the materials indicated by the abbreviations in the table showing the formulation of the above curable composition are as follows:

(分散液)
 分散液1~4:上述した分散液1~4
(Dispersion)
Dispersions 1 to 4: Dispersions 1 to 4 described above

(モノマー(重合性化合物))
 M-1:下記構造の化合物の混合物(左側化合物と右側化合物のモル比が7:3の混合物)
 M-2:下記構造の化合物の混合物(左側化合物と右側化合物とのモル比が45:55の混合物)
 M-3:下記構造の化合物
 M-4:下記構造の化合物
 M-5:下記構造の化合物
(Monomer (polymerizable compound))
M-1: A mixture of compounds having the following structure (a mixture of the compound on the left and the compound on the right in a molar ratio of 7:3)
M-2: A mixture of compounds having the following structure (a mixture of the compounds on the left and right in a molar ratio of 45:55)
M-3: Compound having the following structure
M-4: Compound having the following structure
M-5: Compound having the following structure

(光重合開始剤)
 I-1~I-9、I’-1:下記構造の化合物
(Photopolymerization initiator)
I-1 to I-9, I'-1: Compounds having the following structures

(バインダー)
 B-1:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量14000、酸価79.3mgKOH/g)の40質量%プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)溶液
 B-2:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量11000、酸価31.8mgKOH/g)の40質量%PGMEA溶液
 B-3:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量20000、酸価70.1mgKOH/g)の40質量%PGMEA溶液
 B-4:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量23000、酸価61.4mgKOH/g)の40質量%PGMEA溶液
(binder)
B-1: 40% by mass solution of a resin having the following structure (the numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight 14,000, acid value 79.3 mgKOH/g) in propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
B-2: 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure (the numerical values added to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight 11,000, acid value 31.8 mgKOH/g)
B-3: 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units; weight average molecular weight 20,000, acid value 70.1 mgKOH/g)
B-4: 40% by mass PGMEA solution of a resin having the following structure (the number attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the number attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units; weight average molecular weight 23,000, acid value 61.4 mgKOH/g)

(チオール化合物)
 SH-1:下記構造の化合物(2級チオール基を2個有する多官能チオール化合物)
 SH-2:下記構造の化合物(2級チオール基を3個有する多官能チオール化合物)
 SH-3:下記構造の化合物(2級チオール基を3個有する多官能チオール化合物)
 SH-4:下記構造の化合物(2級チオール基を4個有する多官能チオール化合物)
 SH-5:下記構造の化合物(1級チオール基を4個有する多官能チオール化合物)
 SH-6:下記構造の化合物(1級チオール基を2個有する多官能チオール化合物)
 SH-7:下記構造の化合物(1級チオール基を3個有する多官能チオール化合物)
 SH-8:下記構造の化合物(1級チオール基を3個有する多官能チオール化合物)
 SH-9:下記構造の化合物(1級チオール基を6個有する多官能チオール化合物)
 SHC-1:下記構造の化合物(1級チオール基を1個有する単官能チオール化合物、比較化合物)
(Thiol Compounds)
SH-1: Compound having the following structure (a multifunctional thiol compound having two secondary thiol groups)
SH-2: Compound having the following structure (a multifunctional thiol compound having three secondary thiol groups)
SH-3: Compound having the following structure (a multifunctional thiol compound having three secondary thiol groups)
SH-4: Compound having the following structure (a multifunctional thiol compound having four secondary thiol groups)
SH-5: Compound having the following structure (a polyfunctional thiol compound having four primary thiol groups)
SH-6: Compound having the following structure (a polyfunctional thiol compound having two primary thiol groups)
SH-7: Compound having the following structure (a polyfunctional thiol compound having three primary thiol groups)
SH-8: Compound having the following structure (a polyfunctional thiol compound having three primary thiol groups)
SH-9: Compound having the following structure (a multifunctional thiol compound having six primary thiol groups)
SHC-1: Compound having the following structure (monofunctional thiol compound having one primary thiol group, comparative compound)

(エポキシ化合物)
 E-1:下記構造の化合物
(Epoxy Compound)
E-1: Compound having the following structure

(界面活性剤)
 Su-1:下記構造の化合物(シリコーン系界面活性剤)
(Surfactant)
Su-1: Compound having the following structure (silicone surfactant)

(重合禁止剤)
 In-1:p-メトキシフェノール
(Polymerization inhibitor)
In-1: p-methoxyphenol

(溶剤)
 S-1:シクロヘキサノン
(solvent)
S-1: Cyclohexanone

<信頼性の評価>
 ガラス基板上に各硬化性組成物をスピンコート法で塗布し、次いで、ホットプレートを使用して100℃120秒加熱処理(プリベーク)し、次いでi線で1000mJ/cmの露光量で露光し、次いで、220℃で5分間加熱を行い、厚さ0.6μmの膜を作製した。次いで、ガラス基板上に形成した膜の表面に化学気相成長蒸着法を用いて、膜厚100nmのSiO膜を形成して試験体を作成した。作成した試験体について、分光器(大塚電子(株)製、MCPD-9800)を用いて波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率を測定した。
 上記試験体を恒温恒湿機(EHS-221M、ヤマト科学社製)に入れ、温度85℃、相対湿度85%の雰囲気中、500時間、1000時間、2000時間静置して信頼性試験を行った。信頼性試験後の試験体について、分光器(大塚電子(株)製、MCPD-9800)を用い、波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率を測定した。
 信頼性試験前後の試験体の透過率の変化量の最大値(ΔT%)を求め、以下の評価基準で信頼性を評価した。なお、透過率の変化量の最大値(ΔT%)とは、信頼性試験前後の試験体の、波長400~700nmの範囲における透過率の変化量が最も大きい波長における変化量を意味する。ΔT%が小さいほどシワによる透過率変動が抑制できており信頼性が良好であるといえる。
-評価基準-
 5:ΔT%が10%以下であった
 4:ΔT%が10%を超え、20%以下であった
 3:ΔT%が20%を超え、30%以下であった
 2:ΔT%が30%を超え、40%以下であった
 1:ΔT%が40%を超えた
<Reliability evaluation>
Each curable composition was applied onto a glass substrate by spin coating, then heat-treated (pre-baked) at 100°C for 120 seconds using a hot plate, then exposed to i-line at an exposure dose of 1000mJ/ cm2 , and then heated at 220°C for 5 minutes to produce a film with a thickness of 0.6μm. Next, a SiO2 film with a thickness of 100nm was formed on the surface of the film formed on the glass substrate by chemical vapor deposition deposition to produce a test specimen. The transmittance of the produced test specimen in the wavelength range of 400 to 700nm was measured using a spectrometer (Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd., MCPD-9800).
The test specimen was placed in a thermohygrostat (EHS-221M, manufactured by Yamato Scientific Co., Ltd.) and left to stand for 500 hours, 1000 hours, and 2000 hours in an atmosphere of a temperature of 85° C. and a relative humidity of 85%, for a reliability test. After the reliability test, the test specimen was measured for transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm using a spectrometer (MCPD-9800, manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.).
The maximum change in transmittance (ΔT%) of the test specimen before and after the reliability test was determined, and the reliability was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. The maximum change in transmittance (ΔT%) means the change in the wavelength at which the change in transmittance of the test specimen before and after the reliability test is the largest in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm. The smaller the ΔT%, the more the transmittance fluctuation due to wrinkles can be suppressed, and the better the reliability.
-Evaluation criteria-
5: ΔT% was 10% or less. 4: ΔT% was more than 10% and less than 20%. 3: ΔT% was more than 20% and less than 30%. 2: ΔT% was more than 30% and less than 40%. 1: ΔT% was more than 40%.

<保存安定性の評価>
 各硬化性組成物の粘度(mPa・s)を、東機産業(株)製「RE-85L」にて測定した。上記測定後、各硬化性組成物を45℃、遮光、3日間の条件にて静置し、再度粘度(mPa・s)を測定した。上記静置前後での粘度差(ΔVis)から下記評価基準に従って保存安定性を評価した。粘度差(ΔVis)の数値が小さいほど、硬化性組成物の保存安定性が良好であるといえる。上記粘度測定は、いずれも、温湿度を22±5℃、60±20%に管理した実験室で、硬化性組成物の温度を25℃に調整した状態で測定した。
 -評価基準-
 5:ΔVisが0.2mPa・s以下であった
 4:ΔVisが0.2mPa・sを超え、0.4mPa・s以下であった
 3:ΔVisが0.4mPa・sを超え、0.6mPa・s以下であった
 2:ΔVisが0.6mPa・sを超え、1.0mPa・s以下であった
 1:ΔVisが1.0mPa・sを超えた
<Evaluation of storage stability>
The viscosity (mPa·s) of each curable composition was measured using "RE-85L" manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd. After the above measurement, each curable composition was left to stand at 45°C, shielded from light, for 3 days, and the viscosity (mPa·s) was measured again. The storage stability was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria from the viscosity difference (ΔVis) before and after the above standing. It can be said that the smaller the viscosity difference (ΔVis) value, the better the storage stability of the curable composition. The above viscosity measurements were all performed in a laboratory where the temperature and humidity were controlled to 22±5°C and 60±20%, and the temperature of the curable composition was adjusted to 25°C.
-Evaluation criteria-
5: ΔVis was 0.2 mPa·s or less. 4: ΔVis was greater than 0.2 mPa·s and less than 0.4 mPa·s. 3: ΔVis was greater than 0.4 mPa·s and less than 0.6 mPa·s. 2: ΔVis was greater than 0.6 mPa·s and less than 1.0 mPa·s. 1: ΔVis was greater than 1.0 mPa·s.

<パターン形状の評価>
 直径8インチ(20.32cm)のシリコンウエハ上に、下地層用組成物(CT-4000、富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製)を膜厚が0.1μmとなるようにスピンコート法で塗布し、ホットプレートを用いて220℃で1時間加熱して下地層を形成した。この下地層付きシリコンウエハ上に各硬化性組成物をスピンコート法で塗布し、その後、ホットプレートを用いて100℃で2分間加熱して組成物層を形成した。次いで、i線露光機を用い、0.8μm四方のベイヤーパターンを有するマスクを介して、100mJ/cmの露光量で上記組成物層を露光した。次いで水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム0.3質量%水溶液を用い、23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、スピンシャワーによるリンス、純粋による水洗を実施し、さらにホットプレートを用いて230℃で5分間加熱して厚さ0.6μm、および10μm四方の線幅のパターンを形成した。
 パターンが形成されたシリコンウエハを、走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)を用いてパターンの上面を観察してパターン形状を評価した。以下に示すパターン面積比が1に近いほど、パターン形状が良いことを意味する。
 パターン面積比=(形成したパターンの面積/形成したパターンに外接する四角形の面積)
 -評価基準-
 5:パターン面積比が0.950以上1.000以下である
 4:パターン面積比が0.900以上0.950未満である
 3:パターン面積比が0.850以上0.900未満である
 2:パターン面積比が0.800以上0.850未満である
 1:パターン面積比が0.800未満である
<Evaluation of Pattern Shape>
On a silicon wafer with a diameter of 8 inches (20.32 cm), a composition for underlayer (CT-4000, manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd.) was applied by spin coating so that the film thickness was 0.1 μm, and heated at 220 ° C. for 1 hour using a hot plate to form an underlayer. Each curable composition was applied by spin coating on the silicon wafer with the underlayer, and then heated at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes using a hot plate to form a composition layer. Next, using an i-line exposure machine, the composition layer was exposed at an exposure dose of 100 mJ / cm 2 through a mask having a Bayer pattern of 0.8 μm square. Next, paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using a 0.3 mass % aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide. Thereafter, rinsing with a spin shower and washing with pure water were performed, and further heating was performed at 230 ° C. for 5 minutes using a hot plate to form a pattern with a thickness of 0.6 μm and a line width of 10 μm square.
The silicon wafer on which the pattern was formed was observed by observing the top surface of the pattern using a scanning electron microscope (SEM) to evaluate the pattern shape. The closer the pattern area ratio shown below is to 1, the better the pattern shape is.
Pattern area ratio=(area of formed pattern/area of rectangle circumscribing formed pattern)
-Evaluation criteria-
5: The pattern area ratio is 0.950 or more and 1.000 or less. 4: The pattern area ratio is 0.900 or more and less than 0.950. 3: The pattern area ratio is 0.850 or more and less than 0.900. 2: The pattern area ratio is 0.800 or more and less than 0.850. 1: The pattern area ratio is less than 0.800.

<透明性の評価>
 ガラス基板上に硬化性組成物をスピンコート法で塗布し、220℃で5分間加熱を行い、厚さ0.6μmの膜を作製した。得られた膜について分光器(大塚電子(株)製、MCPD-9800)を用い、波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率を測定した。波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率が高いほど透明性は良好といえる。
 -評価基準-
 5:波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率の最小値が90%以上である
 4:波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率の最小値が75%以上90%未満である
 3:波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率の最小値が50%以上75%未満である
 2:波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率の最小値が30%以上50%未満である
 1:波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率の最小値が30%未満である
<Transparency assessment>
The curable composition was applied onto a glass substrate by spin coating and heated at 220° C. for 5 minutes to prepare a film having a thickness of 0.6 μm. The transmittance of the obtained film in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm was measured using a spectrometer (MCPD-9800, manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.). The higher the transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm, the better the transparency.
-Evaluation criteria-
5: The minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is 90% or more. 4: The minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is 75% or more and less than 90%. 3: The minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is 50% or more and less than 75%. 2: The minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is 30% or more and less than 50%. 1: The minimum transmittance in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is less than 30%.

 上記表に示すように、実施例は信頼性の評価に優れており、湿度の高い環境下に長期間置いた場合であっても、隣接する他の層側の表面におけるシワの発生が抑制された硬化物を形成できた。 As shown in the table above, the examples had excellent reliability ratings, and even when placed in a humid environment for a long period of time, they were able to form a cured product in which the occurrence of wrinkles on the surface of the adjacent layer was suppressed.

 実施例の硬化性組成物は、マイクロレンズに好適に用いることができる。 The curable compositions of the examples can be suitably used for microlenses.

Claims (16)

 TiO粒子およびZrO粒子から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む粒子Aと、
 樹脂と、
 重合性化合物と、
 光重合開始剤と、
 多官能チオール化合物と、を含む硬化性組成物。
Particles A containing at least one selected from TiO2 particles and ZrO2 particles;
Resin and
A polymerizable compound,
A photopolymerization initiator;
A curable composition comprising: a polyfunctional thiol compound.
 前記多官能チオール化合物は、1分子中に2級チオール基を2~4個有する化合物である、請求項1に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 1, wherein the polyfunctional thiol compound is a compound having 2 to 4 secondary thiol groups in one molecule.  前記粒子Aは、TiO粒子を含む、請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物。 3. The curable composition according to claim 1, wherein the particles A comprise TiO2 particles.  前記粒子Aは、透明または白色の粒子である、請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the particles A are transparent or white particles.  前記硬化性組成物の全固形分中における前記粒子Aの含有量が50~80質量%である、請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the content of particles A in the total solid content of the curable composition is 50 to 80 mass %.  前記硬化性組成物の全固形分中における前記多官能チオール化合物の含有量が0.1~5質量%である、請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the content of the polyfunctional thiol compound in the total solid content of the curable composition is 0.1 to 5 mass %.  前記重合性化合物の100質量部に対して、前記光重合開始剤を10~45質量部含む、請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 1 or 2, which contains 10 to 45 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator per 100 parts by mass of the polymerizable compound.  前記多官能チオール化合物の100質量部に対して、前記光重合開始剤を100~2000質量部含む、請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 1 or 2, comprising 100 to 2000 parts by mass of the photopolymerization initiator per 100 parts by mass of the multifunctional thiol compound.  前記光重合開始剤は、オキシム化合物を含む、請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the photopolymerization initiator includes an oxime compound.  前記光重合開始剤は、1分子中にオキシム基を2個以上有するオキシム化合物を含む、請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the photopolymerization initiator includes an oxime compound having two or more oxime groups in one molecule.  前記樹脂は、グラフト鎖および酸基を有する樹脂を含む、請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the resin includes a resin having a graft chain and an acid group.  更に、環状エーテル基を有する化合物を含む、請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a compound having a cyclic ether group.  前記硬化性組成物を用い、220℃で5分加熱して厚さ0.4~1.0μmの膜を形成した際に、前記膜の波長400~700nmの範囲の透過率の最小値が75%以上である、請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物。 The curable composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein when the curable composition is used to form a film having a thickness of 0.4 to 1.0 μm by heating at 220°C for 5 minutes, the minimum transmittance of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm is 75% or more.  請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物を用いて得られる硬化物。 A cured product obtained using the curable composition according to claim 1 or 2.  請求項1または2に記載の硬化性組成物を用いて得られる光学部材。 An optical member obtained using the curable composition according to claim 1 or 2.  前記光学部材は、マイクロレンズである、請求項15に記載の光学部材。 The optical element according to claim 15, wherein the optical element is a microlens.
PCT/JP2024/030357 2023-09-08 2024-08-27 Curable composition, cured product, and optical member Pending WO2025052998A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2023145748 2023-09-08
JP2023-145748 2023-09-08

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025052998A1 true WO2025052998A1 (en) 2025-03-13

Family

ID=94923189

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2024/030357 Pending WO2025052998A1 (en) 2023-09-08 2024-08-27 Curable composition, cured product, and optical member

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TW202511346A (en)
WO (1) WO2025052998A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010266861A (en) * 2009-04-16 2010-11-25 Fujifilm Corp Polymerizable composition for color filter, color filter, and solid-state imaging device
JP2012251125A (en) * 2011-05-06 2012-12-20 Fujifilm Corp Dispersion composition, curable composition using the same, transparent film, microlens and solid-state imaging element
WO2015012228A1 (en) * 2013-07-25 2015-01-29 東レ株式会社 Negative-type photosensitive white composition for touch panel, touch panel, and production method for touch panel
JP2017151321A (en) * 2016-02-25 2017-08-31 富士フイルム株式会社 Curable composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, touch panel, and display device
JP2022078550A (en) * 2020-11-13 2022-05-25 株式会社日本化学工業所 Novel photopolymerization initiator and photosensitive resin composition therewith

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010266861A (en) * 2009-04-16 2010-11-25 Fujifilm Corp Polymerizable composition for color filter, color filter, and solid-state imaging device
JP2012251125A (en) * 2011-05-06 2012-12-20 Fujifilm Corp Dispersion composition, curable composition using the same, transparent film, microlens and solid-state imaging element
WO2015012228A1 (en) * 2013-07-25 2015-01-29 東レ株式会社 Negative-type photosensitive white composition for touch panel, touch panel, and production method for touch panel
JP2017151321A (en) * 2016-02-25 2017-08-31 富士フイルム株式会社 Curable composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, touch panel, and display device
JP2022078550A (en) * 2020-11-13 2022-05-25 株式会社日本化学工業所 Novel photopolymerization initiator and photosensitive resin composition therewith

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202511346A (en) 2025-03-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102672437B1 (en) Coloring compositions, cured films, color filters and display devices
JP2025063188A (en) Colored photosensitive composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and asymmetric diketopyrrolopyrrole compound
WO2022202204A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2022168741A1 (en) Colored composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and compound
KR102897690B1 (en) Coloring composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and compound
WO2023008352A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and dye multimer
WO2022168742A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2020045208A1 (en) Lens composition, lens, lens production method, and display device
WO2024181118A1 (en) Resin composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP7507865B2 (en) Colored composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, resin, and method for producing the same
CN119422109A (en) Photosensitive composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2025052998A1 (en) Curable composition, cured product, and optical member
WO2023085056A1 (en) Curable composition, method for producing curable composition, film, optical device, image sensor, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and radical polymerization initiator
WO2023176335A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2023037828A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2023120431A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical element, image sensor, solid state imaging element, image display apparatus, and pigment for color filter
WO2023085072A1 (en) Colored curable composition, method for producing cured product, film, optical element, image sensor, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and radical polymerization initiator
WO2022196450A1 (en) Colored composition, method for producing film, method for producing color filter, method for producing solid imaging element, and method for producing image display device
WO2025239201A1 (en) Curable composition, cured product, optical member, and method for producing microlens
JP7752627B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, optical sensor and display device
JP7574295B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP7620639B2 (en) Colored composition, cured film, structure, color filter and display device
KR102903359B1 (en) Resin composition, method for producing a film, method for producing an optical filter, method for producing a solid-state imaging device, and method for producing an image display device
WO2025041643A1 (en) Curable composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2022181158A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter and solid-state imaging device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24862650

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1